JP6880356B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine provided with a gaming control means for controlling a gaming in an integrated manner.

Conventionally, a winning opening is provided in the game area, a random number is acquired based on the winning of the hit ball to the winning opening to determine the winning, and a predetermined profit (for example, a special game) is given to the player based on the winning result. A gaming machine that provides a state) is known (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-34663

By the way, in gaming machines, it is required to further enhance the interest of gaming.

An object of the present invention is to further enhance the interest of the game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is
In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state when a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result mode.
It is provided with a game control means for comprehensively controlling the game, a display device capable of displaying an effect related to the game, and an effect control means for controlling the display of the display device.
Corresponding to the execution of the variable display game, the variable display game for production can be executed on the display device.
The game control means
An effect mode control means for selecting and setting one of the effect modes from a plurality of effect modes having different effect modes.
An execution mode setting means for setting an execution mode of the variable display game according to the effect mode set by the effect mode control means, and an execution mode setting means.
When the effect mode control means sets the effect mode, the effect mode control means includes an execution number setting means for setting the execution number of the variable display game that maintains the effect mode.
After the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to convert into a first state in which the starting condition is difficult or impossible to be satisfied and a second state in which the starting condition is more easily satisfied than the first state for a predetermined period. It is possible to generate a specific gaming state in which the period in which the variable winning device is in the second state is longer than that in the normal gaming state.
At the start of the variable display game at which the predetermined effect mode ends, information that can identify that the effect mode ends can be transmitted to the effect control means, and at the same time, information that can identify that the effect mode ends can be transmitted .
When the predetermined period ends, information that can identify that the specific gaming state ends can be transmitted to the effect control means.
The effect control means
It is characterized in that it is possible to set the effect content of the variable display game in which the predetermined effect mode ends in response to the reception of information that can identify the end of the effect mode.

According to the present invention, the interest of the game can be further enhanced.

It is a perspective view which looked at the gaming machine of one Embodiment of this invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram which shows the structural example of the control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a flowchart explaining the main process. It is a figure which shows an example of the bit transpose pattern of a random number. It is a flowchart explaining the checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining the initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart explaining the timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining an input process. It is a flowchart explaining a switch reading process. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the process of updating the remaining number of main prize balls. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the winning opening switch / error monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining fraud & prize-winning monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the winning number counter update process. It is a flowchart explaining a command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining an error check process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the start port switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the common processing of a special figure start port switch. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure hold information determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the symbol variation control process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary process transition setting process 1. FIG. 1 is a flowchart illustrating a variation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the variation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a 2-byte distribution process. It is a flowchart explaining the sorting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation start information setting process. FIG. 2 is a flowchart illustrating a fluctuation start process. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process (special figure 1) during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process (special figure 2) during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process during special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process while displaying a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a special figure. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the effect mode information check process. It is a flowchart explaining the time shortening fluctuation number update process. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of time saving). It is a figure explaining the opening and closing pattern of the upper prize opening. It is a figure explaining the opening and closing pattern of the lower prize opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the processing during a fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart explaining the solenoid information setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 1 during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 2 during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the process during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the big prize opening residual ball processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process 3 during opening of a big winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the processing of the remaining ball of a large winning opening. It is a flowchart explaining the fanfare / inter-interval process transition setting process 2. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing transition setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end processing. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the jackpot end setting process 2. Special figure It is a flowchart explaining the normal process transition setting process 3. It is a flowchart explaining the normal figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining the gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the Fuden winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the usual processing. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary process transition setting process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during a change of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process during display of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process transition setting process in the middle of a normal figure. It is a flowchart explaining the process in the middle of a normal drawing. It is a flowchart explaining the normal electric operation transition setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the ordinary electric | residual sphere processing. It is a flowchart explaining the end process per ordinary figure. It is a flowchart explaining the segment LED editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the radio wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining the external information editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the main prize ball signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the start port signal editing process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout main process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout main process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout-related data reception process. It is a flowchart explaining the payout device control start determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the prize ball control start determination process. It is a flowchart explaining the prize ball control process. It is a flowchart explaining the prize ball payout start processing. It is a flowchart explaining the prize ball payout termination process. It is a flowchart explaining the prize ball payout number update process. It is a flowchart explaining 1st main processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2nd main processing. It is a flowchart explaining 1st scene control processing. It is a flowchart explaining the process during fluctuation. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation time setting process. It is a flowchart explaining the fluctuation time management process. It is a front view of the game board of 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the ball distribution device. It is an exploded perspective view of the ball distribution device. It is a rear view of a cover member. It is a front view of the mounting base member in a state where the distribution member, the ball guide member, the start port 1 switch and the start port 2 switch are mounted. It is a front perspective view of the distribution member. It is a rear perspective view of the distribution member. It is a front view of the distribution member and the ball guide member mounted on the mounting base member. It is a front view of the mounting base member. It is a figure which shows the modification of the ball distribution apparatus. It is a figure which shows the 1st example of the return suppression mechanism. It is a figure which shows the 2nd example of the return suppression mechanism. It is a figure which shows the 3rd example of the return suppression mechanism. It is a figure explaining the case of starting a special effect mode based on the number of start memory reaching a predetermined number. It is a flowchart explaining the special mode change process. It is a figure explaining the case which starts the look-ahead notice effect using a gyrocon, based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number. It is a flowchart explaining the rotating light rotation process. It is a figure explaining the case which starts the look-ahead notice effect using the start memory display based on the number of start memory reaching a predetermined number. It is a flowchart explaining the look-ahead display process. It is a figure explaining the case which starts the probability state notification effect based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number. It is a flowchart explaining the probability state notification processing. It is a figure explaining the case of starting a special effect mode based on the number of start memory gradually reaching a predetermined number. It is a figure explaining the case of starting a special effect mode based on the number of start memory gradually reaching a predetermined number. It is a figure explaining the case of starting a special production mode based on the occurrence of an irregular prize. It is a flowchart explaining the special mode change process.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory diagram of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

[First Embodiment]
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to a main body frame (outer frame) 11 so as to be openable and closable via a hinge 13. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a storage portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 that covers the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (inner frame) 12.

Further, above the glass frame 15, a lighting device (moving light) 16 having a built-in lamp and a motor and a lamp (LED) 17 for notifying a payout abnormality are provided. Further, on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15, a frame decoration device 18 having a built-in lamp or the like to emit light for decoration or production, and a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound (for example, sound effect) are provided. There is. Further, a speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12.

Further, in the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 for supplying game balls to a hitting ball launching device (not shown) and an upper plate for flowing out game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the game machine 10. The ball outlet 22, the lower plate 23 for storing the game balls paid out when the upper plate 21 is full, the operation unit 24 of the hitting ball launching device, and the like are provided. Further, the upper edge portion of the upper plate 21 is provided with an effect button 25 that serves as an operation means having a built-in operation switch for receiving an operation input from the player. Further, a key 26 for opening and locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12.

Further, on the front surface of the glass frame 15 above the upper plate 21, a ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a prepaid card are ejected from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28 to be operated, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the hitting ball launching device directs the gaming ball supplied from the upper plate 21 toward the gaming area 32 on the front surface of the gaming board 30. Fire. In addition, by operating the effect button 25, the player can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). it can.

Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

On the surface of the game board 30, a substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at each of the four corners of the game board 30. In the game area 32, a center case 40 having a display device 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and project forward from the display surface of the display device 41. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the periphery of the display area of the display device 41, project forward from the display surface of the display device 41, and make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

The display device 41 (variable display device) is composed of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) and a CRT (cathode ray tube). In the area (display area) where the image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbols), characters for directing the special figure variation display game, and background images for enhancing the effect of the effect is displayed. .. On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variablely displayed (variablely displayed), and a decorative special figure variable display game corresponding to the special figure variable display game is performed. In addition, an image for producing an effect based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, etc.) is displayed on the display screen. Further, the upper portion and the right portion of the center case 40 are provided with a board effect device 44 that produces a game by operating. The board effect device 44 can operate from the state shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41.

On the left side of the center case 40 of the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate (normal symbol start gate) 34 is provided. Three general winning openings 35 are arranged on the lower left side of the center case 40, and one general winning opening 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

Further, below the center case 40, a start winning opening 36 (first starting winning opening, starting winning area) that gives a start condition of the special figure variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3). The start winning opening 36 is provided with a pair of movable members 37b and 37b that can be opened in an inverted "C" shape at the top and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in, and a second starting winning opening (2nd starting winning opening) inside. An ordinary variable winning device (Public train) 37 having a starting winning area) is arranged.

The pair of movable members 37b, 37b of the ordinary variable winning device 37 always keep a closed closed state (a state disadvantageous to the player) at intervals of about the diameter of the game ball. However, since the starting winning opening 36 is provided above the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state. Then, when the result of the normal fluctuation display game is in the predetermined stop display mode, the normal fluctuation prize is opened by the normal electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device to open in an inverted "C" shape. The device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous for the player) in which the game ball easily flows into the device 37. The game ball that has won the ordinary variable winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It should be noted that the game ball can be won even in the closed state, and the game ball may be more difficult to win in the closed state than in the open state.

Further, below the normal variable winning device 37, the first special variable winning device (first large winning opening, lower large) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure variation display game Winning opening) 38 is arranged.

The first special variable winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c that can be opened by rotating the upper end side in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side, and is the result of a special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game. Depending on how, the big winning opening is changed from the closed state (closed state which is disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (favorable state for the player). That is, the first special variable winning device 38 includes, for example, a large winning opening opened and closed by an opening / closing door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and during the special gaming state, By converting the large winning opening from the closed state to the open state, the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening is facilitated, and a predetermined game value (prize ball) is given to the player. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a lower count switch 38a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two lower count switches 38a are provided, and the gaming ball that has flowed into the large winning opening is detected by one of the lower count switches 38a. By providing a plurality of lower count switches 38a in this way, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball that has flowed into the large winning opening. Further, below the first special variable winning device 38, an out opening 30a for collecting game balls that have not won a prize in the winning opening or the like is provided.

Further, in the upper left part of the center case 40, there is a second special variable winning device (second big winning opening, upper big winning) that can be converted into a state in which the game ball is not accepted and a state in which the game ball is easily accepted depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game. Mouth) 39 is arranged. The second special variable winning device 39 includes a pair of movable members 39c, 39c, and the pair of movable members 39c, 39c are always in a closed closed state (disadvantageous to the player) at intervals of about the diameter of the game ball. State) is held. However, above the second special variable winning device 39, an armor portion 40a that regulates the inflow of the game ball into the center case 40 extends, so that the game ball cannot be won in the closed state. There is. Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode and a special game state is reached, a reverse "C" shape is formed by the large winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 3) as a drive device. It is changed to an open state (a state that is advantageous for the player) in which the game ball can easily flow in, and the game ball can flow in, giving the player a predetermined game value (prize ball). There is. Inside the large winning opening (winning area), a count switch 39a (see FIG. 3) is provided as a detection means for detecting the game ball that has entered the large winning opening. In the special game state, either the first special variable winning device 38 or the second special variable winning device 39 is released, but which one is released is determined by the result mode (special result) of the special figure variation display game. Will be done.

Further, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, the lower right of the game board 30), the first special figure fluctuation display game, the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34, which form the special figure fluctuation display game, are connected. A batch display device 50 for displaying a normal map variation display game triggered by a prize and displaying various information is provided.

The batch display device 50 includes a first special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 1 display) 51 and a second special figure for a first special figure fluctuation display game composed of a 7-segment type display (LED lamp) and the like. The second special figure fluctuation display unit (special figure 2 display) 52 for the fluctuation display game, the fluctuation display unit (normal figure display) 53 for the normal figure fluctuation display game composed of LED lamps, and the same LED lamp. It is provided with storage display units 54, 55, and 56 for notifying the starting memory number of each variable display game composed of. Further, the batch display device 50 has a first game state display unit (first game state display) 57 that lights up when a big hit occurs to notify the occurrence of a big hit, and lights up when a time saving state occurs to notify the occurrence of a time saving state. The second game state display unit (second game state display) 58, and the third game state display unit (third game) that displays that the probability state of the jackpot is in the high probability state when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on. A status display (probability status display unit) 59 and a round display unit 60 for displaying the number of rounds at the time of a big hit (the number of times the special variable winning devices 38 and 39 are opened and closed) are provided.

The special figure variation display game on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 is centered, for example, during the execution of the variation display game, that is, while the decorative special figure variation display game is being performed on the display device 41. Flashes the segment to indicate that it is changing. Then, when the result of the game is "missing", for example, the central segment is turned on as the result mode of the loss, and when the result of the game is "hit", the result mode of the hit (special result mode) is out of order. The game result is displayed by turning on the result mode (for example, a number or a symbol) other than the result mode.

The normal figure display 53 blinks the lamp during the fluctuation to indicate that the fluctuation is in progress, and displays the game result as a lighting mode and a lighting color according to the result of the game after a predetermined time. Further, the normal figure hold indicator 56 displays the start memory number (= hold number) of the normal figure start gate 34, which is a fluctuation start condition of the normal figure display, by turning off, blinking, and turning on a plurality of LEDs. For example, when the number of holds is "0", the lamps 1 to 3 are turned off, and when the number of holds is "1", only the lamp 1 is turned on. When the number of holds is "2", only the lamp 2 is turned on, and when the number of holds is "3", only the lamp 3 is turned on. Then, when the number of hold is "4", all the lamps 1 to 3 are turned on.

The special figure 1 hold indicator 54 turns off a plurality of LEDs for the number of undigested balls (starting memory number = hold number) among the number of winning balls to the start winning opening 36, which is a variable start condition of the special figure 1 display. , Blinking, lighting to display. The special figure 2 hold indicator 55 sets the number of start storages (= number of holds) of the second start winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), which is the fluctuation start condition of the special figure 2 display 52, by turning off the plurality of LEDs. Display by blinking and lighting. Here, the special figure 1 hold indicator 54 and the special figure 2 hold indicator 55 display the start memory number in the same lighting mode as the normal figure hold indicator 56.

The first game state display unit 57 turns off the lamp in the normal game state, and turns on the lamp when a big hit occurs, for example. For example, the second game state display unit 58 turns off the lamp in the normal game state, and turns on the lamp when the time saving state occurs.

The third game state display unit (probability state display unit) 59 turns off the lamp when the probability state of the jackpot is a low probability state (normal probability state) when the power of the game machine 10 is turned on, and the game machine 10 is turned off. If the probability state of the jackpot is a high probability state when the power is turned on, the lamp is turned on.

For example, the round display unit 60 turns off the lamp when not in the special game state, and turns on the lamp corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. The round display unit may be composed of a 7-segment type display.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by launching a gaming ball (pachinko ball) toward the gaming area 32 from a launching device (not shown). The launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by direction changing members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged in various places in the game area 32, and the normal drawing start gate 34 and the general winning opening 35. , The starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, 39 is won, or the game flows into the out port 30a provided at the lowermost portion of the game area 32 and is discharged from the game area 32. Then, when a game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the starting winning opening 36, the ordinary variable winning device 37 or the special variable winning device 38, 39, the number of winning balls (the number of payouts) corresponding to the type of winning winning opening is , Is discharged from the payout unit controlled by the payout control device 170 (see FIG. 3) to the upper plate 21 or the lower plate 23 of the front frame 12. That is, the payout unit forms a payout device capable of paying out the game medium.

On the other hand, in the normal drawing start gate 34, a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3) including a non-contact type switch for detecting a game ball that has passed through the normal drawing start gate 34 is provided, and the game is played. When the game ball driven into the area 32 passes through the normal drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a and the normal drawing variation display game is played. In addition, a state in which the normal figure fluctuation display game cannot be started, for example, a state in which the normal figure change display game has already been played and the normal figure change display game has not ended, or a state in which the normal figure change display game is hit and a normal change winning device is used. When the game ball passes through the normal figure start gate 34 when 37 is converted to the open state, if it is less than the upper limit number (for example, 4) of the normal figure start memory number, the normal figure start memory number is added (for example). +1) and one normal figure start memory will be memorized. The number of stored numbers of the winnings for starting the normal drawing is displayed on the general drawing holding display 56 of the batch display device 50. In addition, the hit judgment random value (hit random value) for determining the result of the normal map variation display game is stored in the normal map start memory, and this hit judgment random value is used as the judgment value. The result of the normal map variation display game is determined with reference to. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the normal map variation display game becomes a hit and a specific result mode (normal map specific result) is derived.

The normal-figure variation display game is provided in the batch display device 50 and is displayed by a variable display unit (general-figure display) 53 composed of LEDs, and the lighting mode and lighting color of the LEDs are normal. Makes identification information (normal pattern, ordinary pattern). In addition, the general figure display 53 is configured by a display device, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after displaying the figures, symbols, and character symbols for a predetermined time, they are stopped and displayed to display the result. You may. When the stop display of the normal variation display game results in the normal map identification result, the normal variation winning device 37 is in an open state in which the pair of movable members 37b of the normal variation winning device 37 are opened for a predetermined time. As a result, it becomes easier for the game ball to win a prize in the second start winning opening inside the normal variable winning device 37, and the number of times the second special figure variable display game is executed increases.

The winning ball to the starting winning opening 36 and the winning ball to the normal variable winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, respectively, which are provided inside. The game ball that has won the start winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball of the first special figure variation display game, is stored as the first starting memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, 4), and is normally changed. The game balls that have won the prize device 37 are detected as the start prize balls of the second special figure variation display game, and are stored as the second start memory up to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). Further, when the start winning ball is detected, a jackpot random value, a jackpot symbol random value, and each fluctuation pattern random value are extracted as start memory information, and the extracted random value is in the game control device 100 (see FIG. 3). The special figure storage area (a part of the RAM) is stored as the special figure start memory up to a predetermined number of times (for example, up to 4 times). Then, the stored number of the special figure start memory is displayed on the memory display unit (special figure 1 hold display 54, special figure 2 hold display 55) for notifying the start winning number of the batch display device 50, and is also displayed at the center. It is also displayed as a decorative special figure start memory display on the display device 41 of the case 40.

The game control device 100 wins a prize in the start winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37, or based on their starting memory, the special figure 1 display 51 (variable display device) or the special figure 2 display 52 (variable display). The device) plays the first or second special figure variation display game. The first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are performed by displaying a plurality of special symbols (special figures, identification information) in a variable manner and then stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode. In addition, a decorative special figure variable display game for variablely displaying a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc.) is executed on the display device (image display device) 41. Then, as a result of the special figure variation display game, when the display mode of the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52 becomes a special result mode (special result), it becomes a big hit and a special game state ( So-called big hit state). In addition, the result mode of the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode.

In the decorative special symbol variation display game in the display device 41, for example, in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numbers and the like is displayed in the left variable display area (first special symbol) and the right variable display area (1st special symbol). In each of the second special symbol) and the medium fluctuation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variablely displayed (high-speed fluctuation) at a speed at which it is difficult to identify. Then, the symbols that are changing after a predetermined time are stopped in the order of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area, and stopped in each of the left fluctuation display area, the right fluctuation display area, and the middle fluctuation display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode composed of the displayed identification information. In addition, the display device 41 plays a variable display game with a decorative special symbol corresponding to the number of special figure start memories, and various effects such as the appearance of characters are performed to improve the interest.

The special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special figure variable display may be displayed independently or not at the same time. The game is displayed. Further, the display device 41 may also use different display devices and different display areas in the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, or use the same display device and display area. However, the decorative special figure variation display game is displayed so that they are not executed independently or at the same time. Further, the game machine 10 may not be provided with the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and the special figure variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41. Further, the second special figure variation display game is executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game. That is, if there is a memory of starting the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game, and the special figure variation display game can be executed, the second special figure variation display game is played. It is supposed to be executed (priority).

Further, in a state where the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started and the number of start memories is 0, the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variation winning device 37) is opened. When the game ball wins a prize, the start memory is stored with the generation of the start right, the number of start memories is added by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure) is immediately based on the start memory. The variable display game) is started, and at this time, the starting memory number is subtracted by 1. On the other hand, a state in which the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) cannot be started immediately, for example, the first or second special figure variation display game has already been played, and the special figure variation display game ends. If the game ball wins the start winning opening 36 (or the normal variable winning device 37) when the game is not in the game state or in the special game state, and the starting memory number is less than the upper limit, the starting memory number is 1. It is added and one start memory is stored. Then, in a state where the start memory number is 1 or more, the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) can be started (the end of the previous special figure variation display game or the special game state). At the end), the start memory number is decremented by 1, and the first special figure variation display game (second special figure variation display game) is started based on the stored start memory. In the following description, when the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game are not distinguished, they are simply referred to as a special figure variation display game.

Although not particularly limited, the starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning port 36, the starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the count switch 38a, The 39a uses a non-contact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) which is provided with a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball by utilizing the phenomenon that the magnetic field changes when a metal approaches the coil. ing. Further, the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10 and the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 or the like are microswitches having mechanical contacts. Can be used.

FIG. 3 is a block diagram of the control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment. The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100, and the game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) that collectively controls a game, and a game microcomputer (hereinafter, referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. It includes a CPU unit 110 having a CPU unit 110, an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, and the like, and a data bus 140 connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

The CPU unit 110 transmits a signal (starting prize detection signal) from a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an interface chip (proximity I / F) 121a for a proximity switch in the input unit 120. It is equipped with an inverting circuit 112 consisting of an inverter or the like that is logically inverted and input to the gaming microcomputer 111, and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a CPU operating clock, a timer interrupt, and a clock that serves as a reference for a random number generation circuit. It has an oscillation circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. A predetermined level of DC voltage such as DC32V, DC12V, DC5V generated by the power supply device 400 is supplied to the game control device 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control device 100 to enable operation. Will be done.

The power supply device 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of DC32V from a 24V AC power supply, a DC-DC converter that generates a lower level DC voltage such as DC12V, DC5V, etc. from a voltage of DC32V. It has a unit 410, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies a power supply voltage to the internal RAM of the game microcomputer 111 in the event of a power failure, a power failure monitoring circuit, and an initialization switch, and causes the game control device 100 to generate and recover from a power failure. It is provided with a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs control signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal to be notified.

In this embodiment, the power supply unit 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, the main unit. It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control device 100 are to be replaced when the model is changed, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply device 400 or the main board as in the embodiment. By providing it, it is possible to exclude it from the target of replacement and reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured by one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the game microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the game control device 100, and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or even after the power is cut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors the voltage of 32V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it drops to 17V or less, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and changes the power failure monitoring signal, and also resets the signal after a predetermined time. Is output. Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that point.

The initialization switch signal is a signal generated when the initialization switch is turned on, and forcibly initializes the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 170. .. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. A reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal that resets the entire control system.

The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read-only ROM (read-only memory) 111B, and a RAM (random access memory) 111C that can be read and written at any time.

The ROM 111B non-volatilely stores invariant information (programs, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control, and the RAM 111C stores the work area of the CPU 111A and various signals and random number values during game control. It is used as. As the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C, an electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM may be used.

Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, and the presence / absence of the occurrence of the reach state. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to refer to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start memory to determine the variation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a missed fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is missed, a jackpot fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a jackpot, and the like. Further, these pattern tables include a table for determining the latter half fluctuation pattern, which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), and fluctuation before reaching the reach state. A table for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is a pattern (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) is included.

Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device whose display state can be changed, and the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are predetermined. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state becomes a gaming state (special gaming state) that is advantageous to the player when the special result mode is adopted, a part of the plurality of display results is already derived and displayed at a stage where the display is not yet derived. A display state in which the displayed display result satisfies the condition of the special result mode. In other words, the reach state is out of the display condition that is the special result mode even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result reaches the stage before the derivation display. Refers to a display mode that does not exist. Further, for example, a state in which variation display is performed by a plurality of variation display areas (so-called full rotation reach) while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are aligned is also included in the reach state. The reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It refers to a display state when at least a part of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition of the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After the display, when the variation display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the left and right variation display areas satisfy the conditions for the special result mode (for example,). The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition of the special result mode in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same). The state in which the identification information is used, except for the special result mode) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variable-displayed from this reach state.

The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and as reach effects in which the possibility of deriving a special result mode is different (expected value is different), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), and so on. Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and premier reach are set. The expected value increases in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variation display mode at least when the special result mode is derived (when it becomes a big hit) in the special figure variation display game. That is, it may be included in the variation display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variation display game (when it is out of order). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is more likely to be a big hit than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 170 and the effect control device 200, or generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device to output the game machine. 10 Control the entire system. Further, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a jackpot random number for determining a jackpot in a special figure variation display game, a jackpot symbol random number for determining a jackpot symbol, and a variation pattern in a special figure variation display game (various types). A random number generation circuit for generating a variable pattern random number for determining (including the execution time of the variable display game in the variable display without reach or reach), a hit random number for determining the hit of the normal figure variable display game, etc. And a clock generator that generates a timer interrupt signal for the CPU 111A with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) and a clock that gives an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113. There is.

Further, the CPU 111A is one of a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) and the special figure normal process (step A9) in the special figure game process described later. Get one variation pattern table. Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result (big hit or miss) of the special figure variation display game, the probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure variation display game as the current game state, and the current game. Based on the operating state (normal operating state or time-saving operating state) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as a state, the number of start memories, etc., one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired from a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables. To do. Here, the CPU 111A serves as a variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

Although not shown, the payout control device 170 includes a CPU, ROM, RAM, input interface, output interface, etc., and drives the payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. , Control to pay out the prize ball. Further, the payout control device 170 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and controls for paying out the ball lending.

The input unit 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111 includes a radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the game machine, a starting port 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting port 2 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, and a general. FIG. The gate switch 34a in the starting gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, and the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39 are connected and supplied from these switches. Interface chips (proximity I / F) 121a and 121b are provided, in which a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V is input and converted into a positive logic signal of 0V-5V. Since the input range of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b is 7V-11V, the lead wire of the sensor or proximity switch is illegally shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead wire is cut. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state such as floating and output an abnormality detection signal.

The reason why the proximity I / F121a and the proximity I / F121b are provided is that the number of input terminals of the proximity I / F121a is limited. The cost of the proximity I / F121b is reduced by using one smaller than the proximity I / F121a according to the number of insufficient input terminals. It should be noted that a proximity I / F121a having the required number of input terminals may be used, and the proximity I / F121b may not be provided.

The outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b are supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Of the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a and the upper count switch 39a are the second inputs. It is input to port 123. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signals 1 and 2 output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected are input to the third input port 124. Further, the detection signal of the magnetic sensor switch 61 for fraud detection provided on the front frame 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 is also input to the third input port 124. A vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine so that the detection signal is input to the third input port 124.

Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main board 100 to the test firing test apparatus (not shown) via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121a and 121b, the detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the inverting circuit 112 in addition to the second input port 123. It is configured as follows. The inverting circuit 112 is provided on the assumption that the signal input terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 receives a signal from a microswitch or the like, and detects negative logic, that is, the low level (0V) as an effective level. Because it is designed to do.

Therefore, when the microswitch is used as the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the detection signal can be directly input to the gaming microcomputer 111 without providing the inverting circuit 112. That is, when it is desired to directly input the negative logic signals from the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a to the gaming microcomputer 111, the proximity switch cannot be used. As described above, the proximity I / F 121a and 121b have a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121a and 121b are supplied with a voltage of 12V in addition to a voltage such as 5V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It has become like.

The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to an effective level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123. be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

Further, the input unit 120 receives signals and payouts from the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 and the like of the game machine 10 and the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 and the like. A status signal indicating an abnormality in payout from the control device 170, a shoot ball out switch signal indicating a shortage of game balls before payout, and an overflow switch signal indicating overflow are taken in and supplied to the game microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. One input port 122 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored (full) in the lower plate 23.

Further, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmidt trigger circuit 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal, an initialization switch signal, and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 or the like, and is provided with a Schmidt trigger circuit 125. The circuit 125 has a function of removing noise from these input signals. Of the signals from the power supply device 400, the power failure monitoring signal and the initialization switch signal are once input to the first input port 122, and are taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, it is treated as a signal equivalent to the signal from the various switches described above. This is because there is a limit to the number of terminals provided on the gaming microcomputer 111 that receive signals from the outside.

On the other hand, the reset signal RST whose noise has been removed by the Schmitt trigger circuit 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and is supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130 to turn off the test firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test firing test apparatus. It is configured as follows. Further, the reset signal RST may be configured to be output to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70. The reset signal RST is not supplied to the ports 122, 123, and 124 of the input unit 120. The data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 just before the reset signal RST is input needs to be reset in order to prevent the system from malfunctioning, but each of the input units 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded by resetting the gaming microcomputer 111.

The output unit 130 includes a first output port 131 that is connected to the data bus 140 and generates a 4-bit data signal to be output to the payout control device 170 and a control signal (data strobe signal) indicating valid / invalidity of the data. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the payout control device 170 by parallel communication. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a buffer 132. The buffer 132 is arranged in the data communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 200, so that a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 200 side, that is, one direction. It is for ensuring communication. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 200 by serial communication. A buffer may also be provided for the signal output from the first output port 131 to the payout control device 170.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and data for notifying the special symbol information of the variable display game to the test firing test device of the accreditation body (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the jackpot, and the like are transmitted via the relay board 70. The output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on the game control device (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as an actual machine (mass production product) installed in a game store. The detection signal of a switch that does not need to be processed, such as a start port switch output from the proximity I / F 121a, 121b, is supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

On the other hand, a detection signal that cannot be supplied to the test firing test device as it is, such as the magnetic sensor switch 61 and the radio wave sensor 62, is once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information, for example, the gaming machine controls the game. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the test firing test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that the state cannot be achieved. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the switch detection signal that does not pass through the buffer, and the like. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and the signal of the port selectively controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test firing test apparatus.

Further, in the output unit 130, a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 1) 38b connected to the data bus 140 to open the first special variable winning device 38 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) opening the second special variable winning device 39 2) A second output port 134 is provided for outputting open / close data of the solenoid (solenoid) 37c that opens the movable member 37b of the 39b and the ordinary variable winning device 37. Further, the output unit 130 has a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content to be displayed on the batch display device 50, and the batch display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED is connected.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information about the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, amusement hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in a game store, and information about the game machine 10 can be externally transmitted. It can be supplied to the device.

Further, the output unit 130 receives the opening / closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b, the large winning opening solenoid 39b, and the general electric current solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134, and generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal. It is output from the second driver 138b and the fourth output port 136 that output the on / off drive signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the driver (drive circuit) 138a and the third output port 135. Outputs the external information signal supplied from the third driver 138c and the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal 71, which outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the current drawing side of the batch display device 50. A fourth driver 138d is provided.

DC32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so that a solenoid operating at 32V can be driven. Further, DC12V is supplied to the second driver 138b that drives the segment line of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit wire is for pulling out the digit wire corresponding to the display data with a current, the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A dynamic drive system in which a second driver 138b that outputs 12V causes a current to flow into the anode terminal of the LED via the segment wire, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws a current from the cathode terminal via the segment wire. The power supply voltage flows through the LEDs selected in sequence with, and the LEDs are turned on. The fourth driver 138d, which outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal 71, supplies the external information signal with a level of 12V, so that DC12V is supplied. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the output unit 130 of the game control device 100, that is, on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board.

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can communicate with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such data transmission / reception is performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in the case of a normal general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 200 will be described with reference to FIG. The effect control device 200 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 made of an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111, and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212 that exclusively controls images under the control of the 1st CPU 211. The VDP (Video Display Processor) 213 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for displaying images on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the 2nd CPU 212, and various melody and sound effects are reproduced from the speakers 19a and 19b. A sound source LSI 214 for controlling the output of sound is provided.

Programs ROM 221 and 222 consisting of PROMs (programmable read-only memory) storing programs executed by each CPU are connected to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212, respectively, to the VDP 213. Is connected to an image ROM 223 in which character images and video data are stored, and a sound ROM 224 in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source LSI 214. The main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 analyzes commands from the game microcomputer 111, determines the production content, instructs the video control microcomputer 212 of the output video content, and instructs the sound source LSI 214 of the reproduced sound. , Lighting of decorative lamps, drive control of motors, management of production time, etc. RAMs that provide work areas for the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212 are provided inside each chip. The RAM that provides the work area may be provided outside the chip.

Although not particularly limited, a serial system is used between the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 and the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212, and between the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 and the sound source LSI 214, respectively. Data is transmitted and received, and data is transmitted and received in parallel between the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212 and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 and VDP 213. By sending and receiving data in parallel, commands and data can be sent in a shorter time than in the case of serial. The VDP 213 includes an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) 213a used for developing and processing image data such as characters read from the image ROM 223, and a scaler for enlarging / reducing an image. 213b, a signal conversion circuit 213c for generating a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method and the like are provided.

A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC is input from the VDP 213 to the main control microcomputer 211 in order to synchronize the image of the display device 41 with the lighting of the decorative lamps provided on the front frame 12 and the game board 30. Further, the VDP 213 informs the video control microcomputer 212 that the interrupt signals INT0 to n and the command and data from the video control microcomputer 212 are waiting to be received in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in VRAM. Wait signal WAIT for is input. Further, a synchronization signal SYNC that notifies that the video control microcomputer 212 is operating normally and gives a command transmission timing is input from the video control microcomputer 212 to the main control microcomputer 211. A call signal CTS and a response signal RTS are exchanged between the main control microcomputer 211 and the sound source LSI 214 in order to send and receive commands and data by a handshake method.

The video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212 uses a CPU that is faster, that is, more expensive than the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211. By providing a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212 separately from the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 and sharing the processing, a large screen and fast-moving video that is difficult to realize with the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 alone can be produced. It is possible to display on the display device 41, and it is possible to suppress an increase in cost as compared with the case of using two CPUs having the same processing capacity as the image control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212. Further, by providing two CPUs, it is possible to separately develop control programs for the two CPUs in parallel, which can shorten the development period of a new model.

Further, the effect control device 200 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 231 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. Through this command I / F231, the decoration special figure hold number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, and the like transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 200 are received as the effect control command signal. .. Since the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 operates at DC 5V and the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 of the effect control device 200 operates at DC 3.3V, the command I / F 231 has a signal level conversion function. It is provided.

Further, the effect control device 200 includes a board decoration LED control circuit 232 and a front frame 12 for driving and controlling a board decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40). A board effect provided on a frame decoration LED control circuit 233 and a game board 30 (including a center case 40) for driving and controlling a frame decoration device having an LED (light emitting diode) (for example, a frame decoration device 18 or the like). A panel effect motor / SOL control circuit 234 that drives and controls a device 44 (for example, a movable accessory that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41), and a motor provided on the front frame 12 (for example, the moving). A frame effect motor control circuit 235 that drives and controls a frame effect device 45 such as a motor that operates the light 16) is provided. These control circuits 223 to 235 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 via the address / data bus 240.

Further, in the effect control device 200, the effect button switch 25a built in the effect button 25 provided on the front frame 12 and the effect switch 44a for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board effect device 44 are turned on. An amplifier circuit 237a consisting of a switch input circuit 236 that detects the / off state and inputs a detection signal to the main control microcomputer (1stCPU) 211, an audio power amplifier that drives the upper speaker 19a provided on the front frame 12, and the like. An amplifier circuit 237b for driving the speaker 19b provided in the frame 12 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 200 having the above configuration and the electronic components controlled by the effect control device 200. DC32V, DC12V for driving the display device 41 consisting of a liquid crystal panel, DC5V for driving the command I / F231, DC18V for driving LEDs and speakers, and a power supply as a reference for these DC voltages. It is configured to generate a voltage of 24V NDC used to turn on the monitor lamp. Further, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V is used as the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 or the video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212, DC3. A DC-DC converter for generating 3V or DC1.2V is provided in the effect control device 200. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

The reset signal RST generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is the main control microcomputer 211, the video control microcomputer 212, the VDP 213, the sound source LSI 214, the control circuit 232 to 235 for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor, and the speaker. Is supplied to the amplifier circuits 237a and 237b that drive the above, and these are reset. Further, in this embodiment, it is configured to have a function of generating and supplying a reset signal for VDP 213 by using a general-purpose port of the video control microcomputer 212. As a result, the cooperation between the operation of the video control microcomputer 212 and the VDP 213 can be improved.

Next, the game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a random value for hit determination in the normal figure based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the normal figure start gate 34, and ROM 111B. Compared with the judgment value stored in, the process of judging the hit / miss of the normal figure fluctuation display game is performed. Then, after displaying the identification symbol on the normal map display with a variation for a predetermined time, a process of displaying a normal map variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of this normal fluctuation display game is a hit, a special result mode is displayed on the normal figure display, the normal electric solenoid 37c is operated, and the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is operated for a predetermined time (for example). , 0.3 seconds) Control to open as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). If the result of the normal map variation display game is out of alignment, the normal map display is controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the start winning prize (starting memory) is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 1 switch 36a provided in the starting winning opening 36, and based on this starting memory, the first special figure variation display game The jackpot determination random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the first special figure variation display game is performed. Further, the start memory is memorized based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the normal variation winning device 37, and based on this start memory, the jackpot determination of the second special figure variation display game is performed. The random value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B, and a process of determining the hit / miss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (effect control command) including the determination results of the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure variation display game to the effect control device 200. Then, after displaying the identification symbol on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 in a predetermined time variation, a process of displaying the special figure variation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is performed. That is, the game control device 100 controls the progress of the variable display game based on the winning of the starting winning area (first starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32. Make.

Further, the effect control device 200 performs a process of displaying the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game on the display device 41 based on the control signal from the game control device 100. Further, the effect control device 200 performs processing such as setting the effect state, outputting sounds from the speakers 19a and 19b, and controlling the light emission of various LEDs based on the control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 200 serves as an effect control means for controlling the effect related to the game (variable display game, etc.).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, and generates a special game state. Perform the process of causing. In the process of generating the special gaming state, the CPU 111A opens, for example, the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 by the large winning opening solenoid 38b, or the second special variable winning device 39 is movable by the large winning opening solenoid 39b. The members 39c and 39c are opened to control the inflow of the game ball into the large winning opening. Then, either a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls wins in the big winning opening, or a predetermined opening time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 seconds) elapses from the opening of the big winning opening. One round is to open the large winning opening until the condition is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed in which this is continued (repeated) for a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 15 times, 11 times, or 2 times). That is, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening / closing control means for controlling the opening / closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is out of alignment, the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 are controlled to display the result mode of the deviation.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this high probability state, the probability of a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, regardless of the high probability state based on the result mode of either the 1st special figure fluctuation display game or the 2nd special figure fluctuation display game, the 1st special figure fluctuation display game and the 2nd special figure Both variable display games are in a high probability state. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, when the high probability state is reached, the high probability state continues until the next derivation of the special result mode.

Further, the game control device 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the normal fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are controlled to be in the time-saving operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device per unit time is controlled as compared with the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operating state. The opening time of 37 is controlled so as to be substantially increased.

For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (normal map fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal map fluctuation display game so as to be the second variable display time shorter than the first variable display time (for example). 10000ms is 1000ms). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal figure stop time for displaying the result of the normal figure fluctuation display game to be a second stop time (for example, 704 ms) shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms). Is. Further, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened as a result of the normal fluctuation display game, the opening time (normal power opening time) is the first opening time (for example, 100 ms) in the normal state. It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer (for example, 1352 ms). Further, in the time saving state, the number of times the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened (the number of times the normal electric power is opened) is larger than the number of times the first opening number (for example, 2 times) is obtained with respect to the result of one hit of the normal fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, the probability of hitting the result of the normal map variation display game (normal figure probability) can be set to a higher probability than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the normal fluctuation time, the normal stop time, the number of times the normal power is opened, the normal power opening time, and the normal probability. Try to extend the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states in which different things are changed. Further, it may be set so that the movable member 37b is not opened in the normal operating state (probability of normal drawing is 0). Further, when a hit occurs, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Further, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently, and both can be generated at the same time, or only one can be generated.

Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine that performs such a game will be described. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer (game microcomputer) 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control process by the game microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main process shown in FIGS. 5 and 6 and the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing]
First, the main process will be described. The main process is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, as shown in FIG. 5, an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) for disabling interrupts is first performed, and then an interrupt vector setting process (step S1) for setting the vector address of the jump destination to be executed when an interrupt occurs (step S1) is performed. Step S2), the stack pointer setting process (step S3) for setting the stack pointer, which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs, is performed. Next, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S4), and the interrupt mode setting process (step S5) for setting the interrupt processing mode is performed.

After that, a process of setting the power delay timer is performed (step S6). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, a program of a slave control means (for example, a payout control device 170 or an effect control device 200) that performs various controls according to an instruction from a game control device 100 that serves as a main control means A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting for normal startup is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 temporarily starts up first and sends a command to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 170 or the effect control device 200) starts up, and the slave control device Can avoid missing commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control device 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control devices (payout control device 170, effect control device 200, etc.). It serves as a waiting means for setting the waiting time.

An initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122, and the operation of the initialization switch is reliably detected by reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time. it can. That is, if the state of the initialization switch is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch may be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the initialization switch may be continuously operated from the power-on until the standby time elapses. I need to do it. However, by reading the state before the start of the standby time, it can be detected by performing the operation immediately after turning on the power without performing such annoying operation, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power. Can be prevented from being unacceptable.

After performing the process of setting the power delay timer (step S6), the process of timing the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S7 to S11) is performed. First, the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S7), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on. (Step S8).

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S8; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is kept on for the number of checks set in step S7 (step S9). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S9; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S8). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously turned on for the number of checks (step S9; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the power of the gaming machine is waited to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is possible to prevent false detection of a power failure due to noise or the like, and appropriately deal with problems when the power is turned on. can do.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during a predetermined standby time. As a result, it is possible to deal with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which is the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with a problem at the time of turning on the power. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the time of the previous power cutoff are retained, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. No need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S8; N), that is, when a power failure has not occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S10), and whether the timer value is 0 or not. Is determined (step S11). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S11; N), that is, if the standby time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of times the power failure monitoring signal is checked (step S7). Further, when the value of the timer is 0 (step S11; Y), that is, when the standby time has expired, access permission is given to the read-write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step S12). ), Output off-data to all output ports (set to no output) (step S13).

Next, a serial port (a port previously mounted on the gaming microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S14), and the first input port read earlier is set. From the state of 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch in the power supply device 400 is turned on (step S15).

When the initialization switch is off (step S15; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (step S16), and if it is normal (step S16). S16; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is the normal power failure inspection area check data (step S17). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S17; Y), the checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S18), and the calculated checksum and the power supply are turned off. It is determined whether the checksums of the times match (step S19). When the checksums match (step S19; Y), the process proceeds to step S20 of FIG. 6, and processing is performed when the power is normally restored from the power failure.

Further, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S15; Y), or when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N). If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S19; N), the process proceeds to step S25 of FIG. 6 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch serves as an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. Make.

In step S20 of FIG. 6, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S20). The areas to be initialized here are a power failure recovery inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error fraud monitoring. After that, the area in the RWM that stores the gaming state is examined to determine whether or not the gaming state is a high-probability state (step S21). Here, if the probability is not high (step S21; N), steps S22 and S23 are skipped and the process proceeds to step S24. Further, in the case of high probability (step S21; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S22), for example, the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided in the batch display device 50 is turned on. (Lighting) Data is saved in the segment area (step S23). Then, a command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the processing number prepared for rationally executing the special figure game processing described later is transmitted to the effect control device 200 (step S24), and the process proceeds to step S29.

On the other hand, when jumping from steps S15, S16, S17, and S19 to step S25, all work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step S25), and all stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared. (Step S26), the initial value at the time of turning on the power is saved in the area to be initialized (step S27). The area to be initialized here is a customer waiting demo area and an area related to the setting of the production mode. Then, the command at the time of turning on the power is transmitted to the effect control device 200 (step S28), and the process proceeds to step S29.

The command for recovering from a power failure transmitted in step S24 and the command for turning on the power transmitted in step S28 include a model designation command indicating the type of the gaming machine and a decorative feature indicating the number of holdings in Special Figures 1 and 2. Fig. 1 Hold number command and decoration Special figure 2 Hold number command and probability information command indicating the state of probability are included. In addition, depending on the state when the power is turned off or turned on, the recovery screen command is used when the special figure fluctuation display game is running when the power is turned off, and the customer waiting demo command is used when waiting for customers when the power is turned off. , If it is initialized at power-on, the power-on command is included. Further, depending on the model, an effect mode information command indicating the state of the effect mode and a time reduction number information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time reduction state are included.

In step S29, a process of activating a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) is performed. The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator 113, and a timer interrupt signal having a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. It also includes a CTC circuit that generates a signal CTC that triggers a random number update to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

After the CTC activation process in step S29, a process for activating and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S30). Specifically, the CPU 111A sets a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit. In addition, the bit transposition pattern of the hard random number (here, the jackpot random number) generated by the hardware of the random number generation circuit is also set. As shown in FIG. 7, for example, the bit transposition pattern is a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the lower bit transposition) by exchanging the bit arrangement of the extracted random numbers (arrangement before the upper bit transposition) in a predetermined order. ) Is a pattern that determines how to replace when storing. By exchanging the bits of the random number according to this bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the confidentiality of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. In addition, the user may be able to set it arbitrarily.

After that, the values of the predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at the time of power-on are extracted, and the corresponding initial value random numbers (random numbers for determining the jackpot symbol (big hit symbol random number 1, jackpot symbol random number 1, jackpot symbol random number)) 2) After saving in a predetermined area of the RWM as an initial value (start value) of a random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal figure (step S31), the interrupt is permitted (step S32). In the random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in this embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is configured to change each time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing so, the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to acquire an illegal random number.

Subsequently, the initial value random number update process (step S33) for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers is performed. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated by using the random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock whose speed is equal to or higher than the operating clock of the CPU, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number have the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing, which is the processing unit of the program. It is a "low speed counter" that is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC2) different from CTC (CTC0) of timer interrupt processing). Further, in the big hit symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, a so-called "initial value change method" is adopted in which the start value is changed by using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number goes around. In addition, each random number may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or a random type update in which all the values in the range appear separately without duplication until one cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by the hardware, and the jackpot symbol random number and the hit random number are random numbers updated by the hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S33, the number of times to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus is set (step S34), and the power failure monitoring signal is turned on. It is determined whether or not there is (step S35). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S35; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S33). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By permitting an interrupt before the initial value random number update process (step S33) (step S32), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is executed. It is possible to prevent the interrupt processing from being overwhelmed by waiting for the initial value random number update processing.

In the initial value random number update process in step S33, in addition to the main process, there is also a method of performing the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the value random number update process, it is necessary to disable the interrupt and then update to cancel the interrupt when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process. If the initial value random number update processing is not performed in the timer interrupt processing and only in the main processing, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update processing, which causes the main processing. It has the advantage of being simplified.

When the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S35; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks set in step S34 (step S36). Then, when the power failure monitoring signal has not been turned on for the number of checks (step S36; N), the process returns to the determination of whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S35). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously on for the number of checks (step S36; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process of temporarily disabling interrupts (step S37) is complete. The process of outputting off-data to the output port (step S38) is performed.

After that, the power failure recovery inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area 1 (step S39), and the power failure recovery inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure recovery inspection area 2 (step S40). Further, after performing a checksum calculation process (step S41) for calculating the checksum when the power of the RWM is turned off and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S42), a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S43). ), And then wait for the power of the gaming machine to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure recovery inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is turned off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power is cut off is correctly backed up. It can be determined when the power is turned on again.

From the above, a main control means (game control device 100) that comprehensively controls the game and a sub-control means (payout control device 170, effect control device 200, etc.) that perform various controls according to instructions from the main control means, etc. ), The main control means is a standby means (game control device) that delays the activation of the main control means and sets a predetermined standby time for waiting for the activation of the slave control device when the power is turned on. 100) and a power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined standby time are provided.

Further, a power supply device 400 for supplying electric power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) is , It is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is based on the fact that the RAM 111C capable of storing data, the initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of being operated from the outside, and the initialization operation unit are operated. An initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing the data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization means is read before the start of the standby time.

Further, the main control means (game control device 100) is configured to allow access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation process]
FIG. 8 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S18, S41) in the above-mentioned main process. In this checksum calculation process, first, the start address of the RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). .. The number of bytes of the RAM used is set in the number of repetitions.

After that, the value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is used as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56), and the checksum is checked. It is determined whether or not the calculation of is completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57: N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57: Y), the checksum calculation process is completed.

[Initial value random number update process]
FIG. 9 shows the initial value random number update process (step S33) in the above-mentioned main process. In this initial value random number update process, first, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S61), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is updated by +1 (step S62), and the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is updated by +1 (step). S63), the initial value random number update process is terminated. Here, the "win initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the normal figure fluctuation game. Further, the "big hit symbol initial value random number 1" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special figure 1, and the "big hit symbol initial value random number 2" determines the jackpot stop symbol of the special figure 2. It is a random number that is the initial value of a random number. In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be increased by continuing to increment the initial value random numbers as long as time allows in the main processing.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 10 is started.

When the timer interrupt process is started, first, a register save process (step S101) for transferring the value held in the predetermined register to the RWM is performed. In the Z80 series microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment, the processing can be replaced by saving the value held in the front register in the back register. Next, input from various sensors and switches and signal acquisition, that is, input processing (step S102) for reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, based on the output data set in various processes, output processing (step S103) for performing drive control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoids 38b, 39b, normal electric solenoid 37c) is performed.

Next, the payout command transmission process (step S104), the random number update process 1 (step S105), and the random number update process 2 (step S106) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 170 are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is a normal signal input from the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a in the normal drawing, the winning port switch 35a, the lower count switch 38a, and the upper count switch 39a, The winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107) for monitoring errors (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. In addition, a special figure game process (step S108) for performing processing related to the special figure variation display game and a normal map game process (step S109) for performing processing related to the normal figure variation display game are performed.

Next, a segment LED editing process (step S110), which is provided in the game machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying a special figure variation game display and various information related to the game so as to display desired contents, a magnetic sensor switch 61. A magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111) that checks the detection signal from the sensor and determines whether or not there is an abnormality, and a radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112) that checks the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 and determines whether or not there is an abnormality. .. Then, an external information editing process (step S113) is performed in which signals to be output to various external devices are set in the output buffer. Subsequently, a process of clearing the interrupt request and declaring the end of the interrupt (step S114) is performed, a process of restoring the register data saved in step S101 (step S115), and then a process of permitting the interrupt (step S115). Step S116) is performed to end the timer interrupt processing.

[Input processing]
Next, the details of the input process (step S102) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch captured in the input port 1, that is, the first input port 122 is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), unused bit data is prepared (step S124), and then the bit data to be inverted is prepared. (Step S125). After that, the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (step S126), the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. .. Here, in the present embodiment, "preparation" means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in RWM or other memory.

Next, unused bit data is prepared (step S129), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (step S130). After that, the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S131), the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S132), and the switch reading process (step S133) is performed. , End the input process.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (steps S128, S133) in the above-mentioned input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area 1 Save (store) in (step S144). After that, it waits for the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

When the delay time (0.1 ms) elapses, the state of the signal captured in the target input port is read a second time (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit ports, the state of that bit is cleared (step S147), the bit that needs to be inverted is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area is used. Save (store) in (step S149). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 1 and the bits having different states are 0 in the first and second readings (step S150), and the logical product of the definite bit pattern and the port input state 2 is taken, and this time. It is set as a confirmation bit (step S151).

Next, an undetermined bit pattern is created in which the bits having the same state are 0 and the bits having different states are 1 in the first and second reads (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the confirmed state at the time of the previous interrupt is created. The product is taken and used as the previous holding bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain a signal state in which noise due to chattering of the switch or the like is removed. Then, the fixed bit this time and the held bit last time are combined and saved as the fixed state this time (step S154), the exclusive OR of the fixed state of the previous time and the fixed state this time is taken, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). The switch reading process ends.

When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch is read by reading the switch once for each interrupt process and comparing it with the result of the previous read to change the signal. There is a method to judge whether or not it has been done, but if it is done so, if the state of the switch read by the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, the correct judgment may not be made. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S103) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the output process, first, off-data is output (reset) to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs the segment data of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output to the solenoid output port 134 that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoids 38b and 39b is combined and output (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the LED digit line corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (step). S164), the acquired data is output to the digit output port 136 (step S165). After that, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S166), and the loaded data is output to the port 135 for segment output (step S167).

Subsequently, the data to be output to the external information terminal 71 is loaded, synthesized, and output to the external information output port 137 (step S168). Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (Step S169). After that, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay board 70. (Step S170).

Next, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (Step S171). Further, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal of the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay board 70 ( Step S172). Then, the data to be output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the combined data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay board 70. (Step S173) to end the output process.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S104) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout command transmission process, first, a check is made out of a plurality of prize number counter areas provided for each prize ball number (for example, 3 prize balls, 10 prize balls, 14 prize balls). It is determined whether or not there is a count number other than "0" in the target winning number counter area (step S181). Then, when there is no count number (step S181: N), the address of the winning number counter area to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is determined whether the check of the count number of all the winning number counter areas is completed. (Step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the payout command transmission process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated.

Further, when it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is subtracted (-1) (step S184), and the winning number counter area The payout command (negative logic data) corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, a strobe off timer that measures the off time of the strobe signal indicating whether the reading of data is valid or invalid (for example, the time for maintaining the low level, for example, 0.015 ms) is set (step S186), and the data is acquired in step S185. A payout command (negative logic data) and an off state (low level) strobe signal are output to port 131 (see FIG. 3) (step S187).

After that, the strobe off timer is updated by -1 (step S188), and it is determined whether the value of the strobe off timer is 0, that is, whether the off time set in step S186 has elapsed (step S189). If the value of the strobe off timer is not 0 (step S189; N), that is, if the off time has not elapsed, the process returns to step S187. Further, when the value of the strobe off timer is 0 (step S189; Y), that is, when the off time has elapsed, the negative logic output remaining timer that measures the remaining output time of the negative logic data (for example, 0.030 ms) is set. Set (step S190).

Next, the payout command (negative logic data) is output, and the strobe signal in the on state (high level) is output to the port 131 (step S191). Then, the negative logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S192), and it is determined whether the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the negative logic data set in step S190 has expired (step S192). Step S193). If the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S193; N), that is, if the output time of the negative logic data has not ended, the process returns to step S191. Further, when the value of the negative logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S193; Y), that is, when the output time of the negative logic data ends, the above-mentioned negative logic payout command data is inverted and the positive logic payout command is given. Data is generated (step S194).

Next, a strobe-on remaining timer that measures the on-remaining time (high-level time, for example, 0.015 ms) of the strobe signal is set (step S195), and the payout command (positive logic data) generated in step S194 is set. The on-state (high level) strobe signal is output to the port 131 (step S196). After that, the strobe-on remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S197), and it is determined whether the value of the strobe-on remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the on time set in step S195 has expired (step S198). If the value of the strobe-on remaining timer is not 0 (step S198; N), that is, if the on-time has not ended, the process returns to step S196. Further, when the value of the strobe on remaining timer is 0 (step S198; Y), that is, when the on time ends, the positive logic output remaining timer that clocks the output remaining time of the positive logic data (for example, 0.030 ms) is measured. Is set (step S199).

After that, the payout command (positive logic data) is output, and the strobe signal in the off state (low level) is output to the port 131 (step S200). Then, the positive logic output remaining timer is updated by -1 (step S201), and it is determined whether the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0, that is, whether the output time of the positive logic data set in step S199 has expired (step S201). Step S202). If the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is not 0 (step S202; N), that is, if the output time has not ended, the process returns to step S200. Further, when the value of the positive logic output remaining timer is 0 (step S202; Y), that is, when the value is finished, information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out to be transmitted from the game control device 100 to the external device is set. The main prize ball remaining number update process (step S203) is performed, and the command transmission process is completed.

By the above processing, a payout command instructing the payout of the game ball is transmitted to the payout control device 170, and the payout control device 170 operates the payout device based on this payout command to pay out the game ball. As described above, by outputting the payout command data of the positive logic after outputting the payout command data of the negative logic, the command receiving side reads and compares the payout command data of the negative logic and the payout command data of the positive logic. Thereby, it can be determined whether or not the correct command can be received. For example, the negative logic payout command data received earlier is logically inverted, and the positive logic payout command data received later is compared. If they are not the same, it is judged as a command reception error and the command is retransmitted. By requesting the game control device 100, it is possible to receive an accurate command. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a control means for controlling the payout device (payout unit) to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition.

Next, the main prize ball signal output to the external device will be described every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). To do.

A game ball wins a prize in a winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37, general winning opening 35, first special variable winning device 38, second special variable winning device 39) provided in the game area 32. With a gaming machine that pays out a predetermined number of game media such as game balls and medals by satisfying a predetermined payout condition such as the establishment of a specific prize (for example, the establishment of a prize with a ball or an arrange ball), the payout is made. Every time the number of gaming media reaches a predetermined number, a signal is output to an external device (hall computer, etc.).

However, for example, when a large number of game balls are won in the prize device per unit time, such as during a big hit, and a large number of prize balls are paid out, the prize ball signal is sent to the external device after the payout is completed. If it is output, it is difficult for the external device to accurately grasp the number of prize balls (the number of balls to be paid out) paid out during the big hit.

That is, since the payout speed is limited, the prize balls generated during the big hit may be paid out after the big hit ends, and the signal to the external device based on the payout of the prize balls is also transmitted after the big hit ends. Therefore, it is difficult for an external device to determine when the prize ball is generated. In recent years, due to the design of gaming machines, the number of gaming machines with a small lower plate that accepts the paid out game balls and gaming machines that do not have a lower plate is increasing, and the paid out gaming balls frequently overflow. Withdrawals are often suspended. This also causes the payout of the prize balls generated during the big hit to be delayed after the end of the big hit, and the signal to the external device based on the payout of the prize balls is transmitted after the end of the big hit.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media and a control means for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In a gaming machine including (game control device 100, payout control device 170), it is possible to accurately grasp the number of payout game media when many payout conditions are satisfied in a short time such as a big hit on the external device side. I am trying to do it.

[Main prize ball remaining number update process]
The details of the main prize ball remaining number update process (step S203) in the above-mentioned payout command transmission process will be described. In this main prize ball remaining number update process, each time the number of prize balls (planned payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case), it is output to an external device. Set the main prize ball signal. In addition to this main prize ball signal, the external device receives a prize ball signal every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 170 (the number of game media payouts) reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). It is designed to be output, and by collating these two signals, it is possible to monitor fraudulent payouts.

As shown in FIG. 15, in the main prize ball remaining number update process, first, the value of the prize ball remaining number area and the number of payouts are added (step S211). As the value of the prize ball remaining number area before this processing, a fraction less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is stored, and in this processing, the value of the prize ball remaining number area is stored. The value of the positive logic payout command is added as the number of newly generated prize balls to be paid out. Then, the added value is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S212).

That is, since the remaining number of prize balls area of the RAM 111C forms a game medium storage area for storing the number of scheduled game media payouts that have not been output to the outside, the game control device 100 serves as a storage means. Further, the game control device 100 serves as an addition means for adding the planned number of game media payouts corresponding to the satisfied payout conditions to the game medium storage area based on the fulfillment of the payout conditions.

After that, 10 which is a predetermined number as a reference for the output of the main prize ball signal is subtracted from the value in the prize ball remaining number region (step S213), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S214). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step S214; N), the main prize ball remaining number update process ends. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S214; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output number region is updated by +1 (step S215), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number region (step). S216), the process returns to step S213.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as a transmission means for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts to the outside based on the number of scheduled game media payouts stored in the game medium storage area reaching a predetermined number. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a subtraction means for subtracting a predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts transmitted by the transmission means from the game medium storage area. In the present embodiment, one main prize ball signal is transmitted corresponding to a predetermined number (10) of planned game media payouts. Further, in this main prize ball remaining number update process, the setting of the main prize ball signal is performed, and the transmission is performed by the main prize ball signal editing process (see FIG. 86) in the external information editing process described later.

By outputting the main prize ball signal in this way, information can be output to the outside when a predetermined payout condition is satisfied, so even if many payout conditions are met in a short time such as a big hit, during the big hit period. It is possible to accurately transmit the number of payout game media to an external device such as a hall computer, and it is possible to accurately grasp the number of payout game media when many payout conditions are satisfied in a short time such as a big hit on the external device side. it can. Further, instead of outputting the data related to the number of game media to the outside as soon as the payout condition is satisfied, the data is once stored in the game medium storage area of the storage means and then output, so that the number of prize balls is easy to handle on the external device side. Information can be output with.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 16 shows the random number update process 1 (step S105) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial values (start values) of the hit random number, the jackpot symbol random number 1, and the jackpot symbol random number 2, which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. In this random number update process 1, first, it is determined whether the hit random number in the normal figure is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S221).

When the hit random number of the normal figure is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; N), it is determined whether the big hit symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224). When the hit random number of the normal figure is waiting for the initial value setting (step S221; Y), the hit random number initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S222), and the next hit random number of the loaded normal figure is loaded. The initial value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S223). After that, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S224).

When the jackpot symbol random number 1 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; N), it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227). When the jackpot symbol random number 1 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S224; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 1 is loaded as the next initial value (step S225), and the next initial initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 1 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) that holds the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S226). After that, it is determined whether the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S227).

When the jackpot symbol random number 2 is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; N), the random number update process 1 is terminated. When the jackpot symbol random number 2 is waiting for the initial value setting (step S227; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number 2 is loaded as the next initial value (step S228), and the next initial value of the loaded jackpot symbol random number 2 is loaded. The value is set in the register (start value setting register) holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S229), and the random number update process 1 is terminated.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 17 shows the random number update process 2 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2-byte random numbers (variable pattern random numbers 1) as variable pattern random numbers, and both of them are to be updated in the random number update process 2. Then, each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Moreover, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, the update of the 2-byte variation pattern random number 1 (random number for determining the reach variation mode) by the random number update process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is executed for either the upper 1 byte or the lower 1 byte. It is configured to.

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232). Then, the upper limit determination value of the random number is acquired from the referenced table based on the calculated address (step S234). The table referred to at this time stores an upper limit determination value for each type of random number, that is, a value for determining whether or not the random number has made a round.

Subsequently, for example, a random value such as a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as R register) used for refreshing the DRAM provided in the Z80 series microcomputer used as the gaming microcomputer in this embodiment. Loads the value of the register in which is set (step S234). Randomness can be added to random numbers by using the value of the R register. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the R register is acquired, and the value of the R register is masked (step S235). The mask value has a different number of bits depending on the random number to be updated, for example, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the R register and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 are used. Is set in the lower 4 bits of the R register when updating. This is because the upper limit differs depending on the type of random number. As a mask value, when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 3 bits of the R register is updated, and when updating the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, the lower 1 byte of the R register is updated. Although 4-bit is illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited to this.

Next, it is determined whether the random number region (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, when the random number region is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; Y), the value remaining by masking the value of the R register with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the addition value (hereinafter, this is used). The mask update value is set by adding "1" to the masked value), the lower 1 byte is set to "0" (step S237), and the process proceeds to step S239. When the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to "0" and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value as the addition value (step). S238), the process proceeds to step S239. The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is to avoid that the masked value may become "0", and if "0" is added later, it does not change from the value before addition. is there.

Then, it is determined whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239), and if it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2 bytes) of the random number region to be updated is set (step S240). , Step S242. When the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), "0" is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated (1 byte) is set as the lower 1 byte of the random number value. ) Is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

In step S242, a value obtained by adding the added value determined in step S237 or S238 to the random number value is used as a new random number value, and it is determined whether or not the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value acquired in step S233 (step). S243). Then, when the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in the random number area lower than the 1-byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245). When the new random number value is larger than the upper limit determination value (step S243; Y), the value obtained by subtracting the upper limit determination value from the new random number value is set as the new random number value again (step S244), and this value is set to 1. It is saved in the random number area lower than the byte random number or the 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number update process 2 is terminated. In the case of a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), a new random number value (if a new random number value is calculated again, that value) is saved in a random number area higher than the 2-byte random number (step S247). ), The random number update process 2 is terminated.

In this way, the CPU 111A updates the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figures 1 and 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning device 37. Random number update means for updating random numbers.

[Winning opening switch / error monitoring process]
FIG. 18 shows a winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 10). In this winning opening switch / error monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, the detection signal from the count switch) corresponding to one of the lower count switches 38a in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is displayed. Data indicating the input port number, the bit position of the signal in the port, and the like are stored) (step S301). Next, a fraud & winning monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether or not there is an illegal winning in the large winning opening even though the large winning opening is not open and to detect a normal winning.

After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other lower count switch 38a in the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored for illegal winning and normal. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S304) for detecting the winning is executed. Then, a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the upper count switch 39a in the upper winning opening (second special variable winning device 38) is prepared (step S305), and it is monitored for illegal winning and a normal winning is detected. The fraud & winning monitoring process (step S306) is executed.

Next, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the Fuden (step S307), monitor whether there is an illegal winning, and detect the normal winning. (Step S308) is executed. Then, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (here, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) that does not require fraud monitoring processing is prepared (step S309), and the number of winnings is updated. The counter update process (step S310) is performed.

Next, the error scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and the signals to be monitored for the error is to be monitored this time is updated (step S311). After that, depending on the value of the error scan counter, any one of the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, the shoot-out switch signal from the payout control device 170, the overflow switch signal, and the payout abnormality status signal. The game machine error monitoring table 1 for setting the error monitoring based on the above is prepared (step S312). Then, an error check process (step S313) for determining whether an error has occurred is performed.

Next, it is determined whether the value of the error scan counter is 3 (step S314), and if the value of the error scan counter is 3 (step S314; Y), the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is terminated. In this case, there is no error monitoring target in the gaming machine error monitoring table 2 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is not 3 (step S314; N), the glass frame open detection switch 63, the front frame open detection switch 64, the switch connector may be disconnected, or the like, depending on the value of the error scan counter. The game machine error monitoring table 2 for setting the error monitoring based on any of the output abnormality detection signals 2 is prepared (step S315). Then, an error check process (step S316) for determining whether an error has occurred is performed, and the winning opening switch / error monitoring process is terminated.

[Illegal & winning monitoring process]
FIG. 19 shows fraud & winning monitoring processing (steps S302, S304, S306, S308) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / error monitoring processing. This fraud & winning monitoring process is applied to each of the two lower count switches 38a of the first special variable winning device 38, the upper count switch 39a of the second special variable winning device 39, and the start port 2 switch 37a of the normal variable winning device 37. This is the process to be performed. For the large prize openings (special variable prize devices 38 and 39) and Fuden (normal variable prize device 37), it is easy for fraudulent activities to open the opening / closing member, insert the game ball, and pay out the prize ball. In addition to detecting fraud, it monitors fraud.

In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning port switch to be error-monitored is checked (step S321), and it is determined whether or not the fraud monitoring period is in progress (step S322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened when the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is the lower count switch 38a, and the winning opening switch to be error-monitored is When the upper count switch 39a is used, it is a period other than during the special gaming state in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened. Further, when the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the starting port 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is executed based on the hit in the normal drawing.

Then, in the case of the fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the target winning opening switch (step S323). When there is no input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332). Further, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target fraudulent winning number is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of fraudulent winnings after addition is the number of fraud occurrence determinations to be monitored (for example). It is determined whether or not the number exceeds (5) (step S325).

The reason why the number of judgments is set to 5 is that, for example, when the large winning opening in the open state is converted to the closed state, the game ball is caught in the door member of the large winning opening, and the game ball has passed the valid period of the count switch. This is to prevent it from being judged as illegal when a prize is won or when there is noise in the signal, and it is not easily judged as an error even though it is not illegal.

Then, when the number of determined items is not exceeded (step S325; N), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330). When the number of determined items is exceeded (step S325; Y), the number of illegal winnings is limited to the number of illegal winnings (step S326), and the initial value is saved in the target illegal winning notification timer area (step S327). Next, the target fraud occurrence command is prepared (step S328), the fraudulent winning occurrence flag is prepared as the fraud flag (step S329), and the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). ).

On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (step S322; N), the winning monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning ball is performed. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and whether or not the notification timer update permission is permitted is determined (step S333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraudulent & winning monitoring process is terminated. When the update of the notification timer is permitted (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, the notification timer is updated by -1 (step S334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to 0.

The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning slot switch to be error-monitored is one lower count switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning slot switch to be error-monitored is the other lower count switch 38a. As a result, regarding the fraudulent notification of the first special variable winning device 38, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60,000 ms). .. When the winning port switch to be error-monitored is the upper count switch 39a or the starting port 2 switch 37a, the update of the notification timer is always permitted.

After that, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335), and if the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, if the time is not up, the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the target illegal release command is prepared (step S336), and the illegal prize release flag is set as the illegal flag. Prepare (step S337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

When the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; Y), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & winning monitoring process, the target number of illegal winnings is cleared ( Step S339), the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S340). If it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338; N), that is, when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the fraud & winning monitoring process before the previous time, the prepared fraud flag is targeted. Compare with the value of the invalid flag area (step S340).

Then, when the prepared fraud flag and the value of the target fraud flag area match (step S340; Y), the fraud & winning monitoring process ends. If the prepared invalid flag and the value of the target invalid flag area do not match (step S340; N), the prepared invalid flag is saved in the target invalid flag area (step S341), and the command setting process is performed (step S341). Step S342), the fraud & winning monitoring process is terminated. By the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 200 when an error occurs, and an illegal winning error release command is transmitted to the effect control device 200 when the error is released, and the start and end of the error notification are set. Will be done.

[Winning counter update process]
FIG. 20 shows the winning number counter update processing (steps S310, S331) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / error monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is acquired from the winning opening monitoring table (step S351), and whether or not there is an input (correctly, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch is checked. Determine (step S352).

When there is no input (step S352: N), it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S357). If there is an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area is loaded (step S353), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354), and it is determined whether or not the overflow occurs (step S354). S355). Then, when the overflow has not occurred (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area (step S356), and it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S357). When an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches has been completed (step S357).

When the monitoring of all the switches is not completed (step S357; N), the process returns to the process of determining whether or not the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352). When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S357; Y), the winning number counter update process is completed. By the above processing, a prize ball is set according to the winning.

[Command setting process]
FIG. 21 shows a command setting process (step S342) in the above-mentioned fraud & winning monitoring process. Note that this command setting process is a process common to the command setting process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process. In this command setting process, first, the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S361), the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S362), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted. (Step S363).

When the command is being transmitted (step S363; Y), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366). If the command is not being transmitted (step S363; N), the transmission circuit may be abnormal, so the transmission circuit is initialized (step S364), and the command data (MODE (upper byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer (step S363; N). After step S365), the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is written to the serial transmission buffer (step S366).

Then, the serial transmission buffer status is read (step S367), and it is determined whether the command is being transmitted (step S368). If the command is being transmitted (step S368; Y), the command setting process ends. If the command is not being transmitted (step S368; N), the transmission circuit may be abnormal, so the transmission circuit is initialized (step S369), and the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) is rewritten to the serial transmission buffer. (Step S370), the command setting process is terminated.

As described above, by transmitting the command to the effect control device 200 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced and the analysis of the command can be made difficult. In addition, the command transmission timing can be accelerated and the number of data lines can be reduced. Further, the effect control device 200 does not need to capture commands in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced. The command may also be transmitted to the payout control device 170 by serial communication.

[Error check processing]
FIG. 22 shows the error check processing (steps S313 and S316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / error monitoring processing. In this error check process, first, an error monitoring table corresponding to the error scan counter is acquired (step S381), and whether the switch (including the signal) to be monitored is on, that is, whether it is in a state indicating an error. Determine (step S382).

Then, when the switch is not turned on (step S382: N), an error release flag is prepared as an error flag (step S383), and a target error notification end command is prepared (step S384). After that, the target error release monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S385), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the state of the current switch (step S389).

On the other hand, when the switch is on (step S382: Y), an error occurrence flag is prepared as an error flag (step S386), and a target error notification command is prepared (step S387). After that, the target error occurrence monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S388), and the value of the target switch control area is compared with the state of the current switch (step S389).

If the value of the target switch control area and the current switch status match (step S389; Y), that is, if the switch status has not changed, the target error monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S392). , It is determined whether the value of the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393). Further, when the value of the target switch control area and the state of the current switch do not match (step S389; N), that is, when the state of the switch changes, the current switch state is saved in the target switch control area (step S389; N). Step S390), the target error monitoring timer is cleared (step S391), the target error monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S392), and the value of the target error monitoring timer has reached the monitoring timer comparison value. Is determined (step S393).

If the value of the target error monitoring timer has not reached the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393; N), the error check process ends. When the value of the target error monitoring timer reaches the monitoring timer comparison value (step S393: Y), the error monitoring timer is updated by -1 to keep the comparison value -1 (step S394), and the preparation is made. The error flag is compared with the value of the target error flag area (step S395).

Then, when the prepared error flag and the value of the target error flag area match (step S395; Y), the error check process ends. If the set error flag and the value of the target error flag area do not match (step S395; N), the prepared error flag is saved in the target error flag area (step S396), and the command setting process is performed. (Step S397), the error check process is terminated.

[Special game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game processing (step S108) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the special figure game process, the inputs of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are monitored, the entire process related to the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the special figure display is set.

As shown in FIG. 23, in the special figure game process, first, a start port switch monitoring process (step A1) for monitoring the winning of the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. In the start port switch monitoring process, when a game ball is won in the start winning opening 36 and the normal variable winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted and special features based on the winning are obtained. Figure Fluctuation display A game result pre-judgment is performed to predetermine a game result based on a prize at a stage before the start of the game. The details of the start port switch monitoring process (step A1) will be described later.

Next, the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the game ball by the lower count switch 38a provided in the first special variable winning device 38 and the upper count switch 39a provided in the second special variable winning device 39 is monitored. Perform the processing to be performed.

Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step A3). The minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step A4). When the value of the special figure game processing timer is 0 (step A4; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the special figure game processing number is referred to for branching to the processing corresponding to the special figure game processing number. The figure game sequence branch table is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, the return address after the branch processing is completed is saved in the stack area (step A7), and the game branch processing (step A8) is performed according to the game processing number.

In step A8, when the game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the special figure fluctuation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the special figure fluctuation display game, and the processing during the special figure fluctuation are performed. A special figure normal process (step A9) for setting information necessary for performing is performed. In step A8, when the game processing number is "1", the special figure changing process (step) for setting the stop display time of the special figure, setting the information necessary for performing the special figure display processing, and the like. Perform A10).

In step A8, when the game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the fanfare command is set according to the type of big hit, and the big winning opening opening pattern of each big hit. The special figure display processing (step A11) for setting the fanfare time according to the above, setting the information necessary for performing the fanfare / interval processing, and the like is performed.

If the game processing number is "3" in step A8, set the opening time of the big winning opening, update the number of opening times, set the information necessary for processing while the big winning opening is open, etc. Fanfare / Process during the interval (step A12) is performed. In step A8, when the game processing number is "4", the interval command is set if the jackpot round is not the final round, while the ending command is set if the jackpot round is the final round, or the remaining ball processing of the big winning opening. Perform the process (step A13) during the opening of the large winning opening, which sets the information necessary for performing the above.

In step A8, when the game processing number is "5", if the jackpot round is the final round, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the jackpot to be discharged and the jackpot end processing are performed. The large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A14) for setting the information necessary for the game is performed. In step A8, when the game processing number is "6", the jackpot end processing (step A15) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure normal processing (step A9) is performed.

After that, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 1 display 51 (step A16), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A17) related to the special figure 1 display 51 is performed. Then, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A18), the symbol fluctuation control process (step A19) related to the special figure 2 display 52 is performed. On the other hand, in step A4, when the value of the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (step A4; N), that is, when the time is not up, the processing is shifted to step A16, and the subsequent processing is performed.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the start port switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the start port switch monitoring process, first, after preparing a table for setting the holding information by the first start port (start winning opening 36) (step A111), the special figure start port switch common process. (Step A112) is performed. The details of the special figure start port switch common process in step A112 will be described later together with the special figure start port switch common process in step A116.

Next, it is determined whether or not the ordinary electric accessory (ordinary variable winning device 37) is operating, that is, whether or not the ordinary variable winning device 37 is activated and is in an open state in which a game ball can be won (. If it is determined in step A113) that the normal electric accessory is in operation (step A113; Y), the process proceeds to step A115, and subsequent processes are performed. On the other hand, in step A113, if it is determined that the normal electric accessory is not operating (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the electric power fraud is occurring (step A114).

In the determination of whether or not a fraudulent occurrence is occurring, it is determined that fraudulent occurrence is occurring when the number of fraudulent winnings in the ordinary variable winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraudulent occurrence determinations (for example, 5). In the normal variable winning device 37, the game ball cannot be won in the closed state, and the game ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, if a game ball wins in the closed state, it means that some abnormality or fraud has occurred, and if there is a game ball that wins in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent prizes. Then, when the number of fraudulent winnings counted in this way is equal to or greater than the predetermined number of fraud occurrence determinations (upper limit value), it is determined that fraud has occurred.

In step A114, if it is determined that the electric power fraud has not occurred (step A114; N), after preparing a table for setting the information of the hold by the second starting port (normal variable winning device 37) (step A115), the special feature. Figure The start port switch common process (step A116) is performed to end the start port switch monitoring process. If it is determined in step A114 that an illegal operation is occurring (step A114; Y), the start port switch monitoring process is terminated. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated any more.

[Special figure start port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special figure start port switch common process (steps A112 and A116) in the above-mentioned start port switch monitoring process will be described. The special figure start port switch common process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 25, in the special figure start port switch common process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port switch to be monitored among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a (step). A201). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A201; N), the special figure start port switch common process ends. On the other hand, when there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A201; Y), it is determined whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the special figure start port switch common process ends. If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A202; Y), after saving the start port winning flag of the start port switch to be monitored (step A203), the hard random number latch register to be monitored is stored. The extracted jackpot random numbers are loaded and prepared (step A204).

Subsequently, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, the start port signal which is the number of times the information regarding the number of winnings to the start port switch to be monitored is output to the external management device of the gaming machine 10. The number of outputs is loaded (step A205), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step A206), and it is determined whether the number of outputs overflows (step A207). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A207; N), the updated value is saved in the start port signal output count area of the RWM (step A208), and the process proceeds to step A209. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A207; Y), the process shifts to step A209.

Next, among the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a, it is determined whether the number of special figure reservations (starting memory) of the update target corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is less than the upper limit value (step A209). When the number of special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A209; Y), the number of special figure reservations to be updated (the number of special figure 1 hold or the number of special figure 2 hold) is updated by +1 (step A212), and the monitoring target. The start port switch and the decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure hold number command are prepared (step A213), and the command setting process (step A214) is performed.

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure hold number corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored is calculated (step A215), and the big hit random number is saved in the big hit random number storage area of the RWM (step A216). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the start port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (step A217), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A218). Further, the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are extracted and saved in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of the RWM corresponding to each random number (step A219). Then, the special figure reservation information determination process (step A220) is performed to end the special figure start port switch common process.

Here, the game control device 100 (RAM111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start winning opening 36 and the starting winning area of the normal variable winning device 37, and becomes the execution right of the variable display game. It serves as a starting prize storage means for storing a predetermined number as a starting memory up to a predetermined number. Further, the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) stores various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (starting winning opening 36) up to a predetermined number in the first starting winning storage means. And various random value values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning device 37) are stored as the second starting memory up to a predetermined number.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A209 that the number of special figure reservations is not less than the upper limit (step A209; N), the decorative special figure reservation number command (hold overflow command) is prepared (step A210), and the command setting process (step). A211) is performed to end the special figure start port switch common process.

[Special figure reservation information judgment processing]
Next, the details of the special figure hold information determination process (step A220) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process for determining result-related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, it is determined whether or not the condition for executing the look-ahead effect is satisfied (step A231), and if it is not satisfied (step A231; N), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. .. If it is satisfied (step A231; Y), the following process related to the look-ahead effect is performed.

Here, the case where the condition for executing the look-ahead effect is satisfied is the case where the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special figure start port switch common process is the input of the start port 2 switch 37a. Further, when the input of the start port switch according to step A201 of the special figure start port switch common process is the input of the start port 1 switch 36a, the opening extension function of the normal variable winning device 37 is not operating, that is, the time is shortened. It is a case where it is not in a state, and it is a case where it is not in a big hit (special game state).

In the process related to the look-ahead effect performed when the condition for executing the look-ahead effect is satisfied (step A231; Y), first, whether or not the jackpot is a big hit depending on whether or not the jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value. The jackpot determination process (step A232) for determining the above is performed. Then, when the determination result is a big hit (step A233; Y), the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target start port switch is set (step A234), the big hit symbol random number is checked, and the corresponding big hit stop symbol is checked. The pattern is acquired (step A235), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the look-ahead stop symbol pattern area (step A237). On the other hand, when the determination result is not a big hit (step A233; N), the out-of-order stop symbol pattern is set (step A236), and the stop symbol pattern is saved in the look-ahead stop symbol pattern area (step A237).

After that, the look-ahead symbol command corresponding to the target start port switch and stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A238), and the command setting process is performed (step A239). Next, the special figure information setting process (step A240) for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is performed, and the latter half fluctuation pattern setting information table corresponding to the target start port switch is prepared (step). A241), the variation pattern setting process for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A242).

Then, a look-ahead variation pattern command corresponding to the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game is prepared (step A243), and the command setting process is performed (step A243). Step A244), the special figure reservation information determination process is terminated. The special figure information setting process in step A240 and the variation pattern setting process in step A242 are the same as the processes executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal processing.

By the above processing, a look-ahead symbol command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and a look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are prepared. And transmitted to the effect control device 200. As a result, the judgment result (look-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether or not it is a big hit and the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is controlled to be produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 200 can be notified, and in particular, the result-related information is given to the player before the start timing of the special figure variation display game by changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start prize storage means (game control device 100) before executing the variation display game based on the start memory (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained). (Judgment such as) Makes a preliminary judgment means. It should be noted that the time to determine the random number value stored in advance corresponding to the start memory is not only when the start memory occurs but also before the variable display game based on the start memory is played. Good.

[Great winning opening switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the large winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the large winning opening switch monitoring process, first, whether the large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38 or second special variable winning device 39) is open, that is, in a special gaming state. Is determined (step A251). If the big winning opening is not open (step A251; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process ends. If the large winning opening is open (step A251; Y), 0 is set in the winning counter for counting the number of winnings to the large winning opening added in the current large winning opening switch monitoring process. (Step A252), it is determined whether the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38) is open, that is, in a special gaming state in which the first special variable winning device 38 is opened (step A253).

When the lower prize opening is open (step A253; Y), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing performed at the end of one round is in progress (step A254). If the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A254; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. Further, when the processing of the remaining balls of the large winning opening is not in progress (step A254; N), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower winning opening switch 1 (one of the lower count switches 38a) (step A255).

When there is no input in the lower prize opening switch 1 (step A255; N), it is determined whether there is an input in the lower prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259). If there is an input to the lower prize opening switch 1 (step A255; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A256), and the lower prize winning opening count command is prepared (step A257). Then, the command setting process (step A258) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is an input to the lower grand prize opening switch 2 (the other lower count switch 38a) (step A259).

When there is no input to the lower prize opening switch 2 (step A259; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). If there is an input to the lower prize opening switch 2 (step A259; Y), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A260), and the lower prize winning opening count command is prepared (step A261). Then, the command setting process (step A262) is performed to determine whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268).

On the other hand, when the lower grand prize opening is not open (step A253; N), that is, the upper grand prize opening (second special variable winning device 39) is open (a special game in which the second special variable winning device 39 is opened). If it is in the state), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the upper prize opening switch (upper count switch 39a) (step A263). If there is no input to the upper prize opening switch (step A263; N), the large winning opening switch monitoring process ends. Further, when there is an input to the upper prize opening switch (step A263; Y), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A264).

If the remaining ball of the big winning opening is not being processed (step A264; N), the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A265), and the upper winning opening counting command is prepared (step A266). If the remaining ball of the big winning opening is being processed (step A264; Y), the upper winning opening counting command is prepared (step A266). After that, the command setting process (step A267) is performed to determine whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268). In the case of the upper prize opening, the upper prize opening count command is transmitted even during the processing of the remaining balls of the upper prize opening in order to produce the effect by winning.

In the determination of whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268), if the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A268; Y), the large winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated.
If the value of the winning counter is not 0 (step A268; N), the value of the winning counter is added to the number of winning openings (step A269), and the number of winning openings is the upper limit (winning in one round). It is determined whether or not the number of game balls is equal to or greater than the number of possible game balls (step A270).

If the number of winning openings is not equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; N), the winning opening switch monitoring process is terminated. When the number of large winning openings is equal to or greater than the upper limit (step A270; Y), the number of large winning openings is kept at the upper limit (step A271), and the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (step). A272). Then, the pointer is loaded from the jackpot middle control pointer upper limit value area (step A273), the loaded pointer is saved in the jackpot middle control pointer area (step A274), and the jackpot switch monitoring process is completed. As a result, the big prize opening will be closed and one round will end.

[Design fluctuation control process]
Next, the details of the symbol variation control process (steps A17, A19) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. The symbol variation control process is a process for controlling the variation of special symbols such as the first special symbol and the second special symbol and setting the display data of the special symbol. As shown in FIG. 28, in the symbol fluctuation control process, first, among the first special figure and the second special figure, the special figure fluctuation control flag related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is changing. Check if it is (step A281).

Then, when the special figure changing flag is changing (step A282; Y), the symbol display table (for change) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step). A283), among the first special figure and the second special figure, the blinking control timer related to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is updated by -1 (step A284), and the value of the timer is 0. That is, it is determined whether the time is up (step A285).

When the value of the blinking control timer is not 0 (step A285; N), the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A288). When the value of the blinking control timer is 0 (step A285; Y), the initial value of the blinking control timer is saved in the blinking control timer area to be controlled (step A286), and the first special figure and the second special figure are taken. Among them, the variable symbol number related to the control target special figure (for example, the first special figure) is updated by +1 (step A287), and the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A288). ). After that, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is completed.

On the other hand, when the special figure changing flag is not changing (step A282; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the special figure to be controlled (for example, the first special figure) is acquired (step A289). .. Then, the display data corresponding to the value of the target variable symbol number area is acquired (step A290), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A291), and the symbol variation control process is terminated. As a result, among the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52, the special figure corresponding to the symbol number is displayed on the special figure display (for example, the special figure 1 display 51) to be controlled. It becomes.

[Special figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal processing (step A9) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 hold number (second start storage number) is 0 (step A301). When it is determined that the special figure 2 hold number is 0 (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 hold number (first start storage number) is 0 (step A306). Then, when it is determined that the number of reserved special figures 1 is 0 (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo has been started (step A311), and when the customer waiting demo has not been started (step A311; N) saves the customer waiting demo flag area in the customer waiting demo flag area (step A312).

Subsequently, the customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), the command setting process (step A314) is performed, the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure normal processing is completed. On the other hand, if the customer waiting demo has already started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step A315) is performed to end the special figure normal processing.

As shown in FIG. 30, in the special figure normal processing transition setting process 1, "0" related to the special figure normal processing is set as the processing number (step A321), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A321). Step A322), the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A323). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A325). Figure Ends the normal process transition setting process 1.

Returning to FIG. 29, in step A301, when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0 (step A301; N), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number after -1 update is prepared (step A301; N). Step A302) and command setting processing (step A303) are performed. Next, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is performed, the special figure change process transition setting process (step A305) of the special figure 2 is performed, and the special figure normal process is completed. Further, in step A306, when the special figure 1 hold number is not 0 (step A306; N), a decorative special figure hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number after -1 update is prepared (step A307). , Command setting process (step A308) is performed. Next, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A309) is performed, the special figure change process transition setting process (step A310) of the special figure 1 is performed, and the special figure normal process is completed. That is, it is configured to execute the special figure variation display game based on the start memory based on the predetermined condition that the start memory exists and the special figure variation display game is not being executed, not in the special game state. There is.

At the time of performing the process of preparing the decorative special figure hold number command (steps A307 and A302), the hold number based on the start of the special figure variation display game has not been subtracted, and the current special figure 1 hold number or A hold number command corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number, which is -1 from the special figure 2 hold number, is prepared. The process of actually updating the special figure 1 hold number or the special figure 2 hold number by -1 is the change start information setting process (FIG. 39) in the special figure 1 change start process (step A309) or the special figure 2 change start process (step A304). (See) in step A441.

In this way, by checking the special figure 2 hold number before the check of the special figure 1 hold number, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A304) is executed when the special figure 2 hold number is not 0. Will be done. That is, the second special figure variation display game is executed in preference to the first special figure variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start winning memory means (game control device 100), the variation display game based on the second start memory is changed based on the first start memory. It serves as a priority control means that is executed with priority over the display game.

[Special Figure 1 Fluctuation Start Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A309) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game. As shown in FIG. 31, first, the special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331), and the first special figure fluctuation is performed. The jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set the jackpot flag 1 deviation information and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot.

Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) related to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. The information setting process (step A334) is performed, and the special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the variation pattern of the first special figure variation display game is set, is prepared. (Step A335). After that, the variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting the variation pattern, which is the variation mode in the first special figure variation display game, is performed, and the variation start information setting process for setting the variation start information of the first special figure variation display game is performed. (Step A337) is performed to end the special figure 1 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 1 setting process]
FIG. 32 shows the jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this jackpot flag 1 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A341). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 1 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) of RWM (step A342). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 1). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A343) for determining whether or not the jackpot is a jackpot is performed according to whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A343) is a jackpot (step A344; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 1 area where the loss information was saved in step A341 (step A345). ), The jackpot flag 1 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A343) is not a jackpot (step A344; N), the jackpot flag 1 setting process is terminated while saving the information about the jackpot flag 1.

[Big hit judgment process]
FIG. 33 shows the jackpot determination process (step A343) in the jackpot flag 1 setting process described above. In this jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit determination value of the jackpot determination value is set (step A351), and it is determined whether the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352). The big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit determination value. The jackpot judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is equal to or higher than the lower limit judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and is equal to or less than the upper limit judgment value which is the upper limit value of the jackpot judgment value. , It is judged to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; Y), that is, if it is out of alignment, an outlier is set as the determination result (step A357), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. Further, when the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit determination value (step A352; N), it is determined whether the state is in a high probability state (step A353).

Then, in the case of the high probability state (step A353; Y), the upper limit determination value in the high probability is set (step A354), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). ). If the probability is not high (step A353; N), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (step A355), and it is determined whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356). ..

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; Y), that is, if it is out of alignment, an outlier is set as the determination result (step A357), and the jackpot determination process is terminated. If the value of the jackpot random number is not larger than the upper limit determination value (step A356; N), that is, if it is a jackpot, a jackpot is set as the determination result (step A358), and the jackpot determination process is terminated.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 34 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A361), and if it is a big hit (step A361; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A362). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot symbol table is set (step A363), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A364). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A365), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A366). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 1 display 51) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A367). The probability fluctuation determination flag is for setting the probability state after the end of the special game state.

Further, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A368), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired to open the large winning opening. Save in the information area (step A369). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A372).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A361; N), the stop symbol number at the time of loss is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A370), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step). A371), prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A372). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A373), and the command setting process (step A374) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 200. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A375), and the special figure 1 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) is cleared to 0 (step A376). FIG. 1 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

[Special figure information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (step A334) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 35, in the special figure information setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure time reduction is in progress (time reduction state) (step A381). When the special figure time is not shortened (step A381; N), the fluctuation pattern selection group information table at the normal time is set (step A382). Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step A381; Y), the variation pattern selection group information table during the time reduction is set (step A383).

Then, the special figure hold number corresponding to the variable symbol determination flag is loaded (step A384), the variable pattern selection group information corresponding to the special figure hold number is acquired and saved in the variable distribution information 1 area (step A385). .. As a result, in the fluctuation distribution information 1 area, the type of the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) at which the fluctuation is started, the hold number information which is the information on the start storage number for the type of the special figure, and the time saving The variable distribution information 1 obtained from the game status information including the status information is saved. This variable distribution information 1 is later used to select a variable group. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns, and when determining the fluctuation pattern, the fluctuation group is first selected, and then one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Next, the distribution base pointer table is set (step A386), and the distribution base pointer corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A387). Further, the effect mode number is added to the acquired pointer (step A388), the added value is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area (step A389), and the special figure information setting process is completed. As a result, the variable distribution information 2 obtained from the stop symbol pattern information and the effect mode information is saved in the variable distribution information 2 area. This variable distribution information 2 is later used to select a variable group. As the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes according to the probability state, the presence / absence of the time saving state, the progress status of the special figure variation display game, and the like.

In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, five modes 0 to 4 are prepared as the effect modes. The effect mode 0 (effect mode number is 0) and the effect mode 1 (effect mode number 1) are prepared as the effect modes that can be selected when the normal probability state and the time reduction state are not obtained. Further, as an effect mode that can be selected when the time is shortened in a state where the normal probability state or the high probability state is not clearly notified (so-called latent state), the effect mode 2 (effect mode number is 2) is used. It is prepared. Further, as an effect mode that can be selected in a high probability state and a time saving state, an effect mode 3 (effect mode number 3) and an effect mode 4 (effect mode number 4) are prepared.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the variation pattern setting process (step A336) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process will be described. The fluctuation patterns are the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation mode from the reach state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game. It consists of a pattern, and the latter half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

As shown in FIG. 36, in the variation pattern setting process, first, the variation group selection address table is set (step A391), and the address of the latter half variation group table corresponding to the variation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A392). ). Then, it is determined whether the effect mode number is less than 2 (either 0 or 1) (step A393). When the effect mode number is not less than 2 (step A393; N), it is determined whether the stop symbol pattern is the detached stop symbol pattern (step A394), and when the stop symbol pattern is not the detached stop symbol pattern (step A394; N). ) Is prepared by loading the variation pattern random number 1 from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A397).

On the other hand, when the effect mode number is less than 2 (step A393; Y) or when the stop symbol pattern is a detached stop symbol pattern (step A394; Y), the variable distribution information 1 is obtained from the table prepared in step A392. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to (step A395). Next, the acquired address is prepared as the address of the latter half variation group (step A396), and the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded and prepared from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (step A397).

If the effect mode number is less than 2, or if the stop symbol pattern is a detached stop symbol pattern, the address is acquired by taking into account the variable distribution information 1 obtained from the hold number information, which is the information related to the start memory number. By doing so, the selection mode of the fluctuation pattern is made different depending on the number of start-up memories.

After that, 2-byte distribution processing (step A398) is performed, the address of the latter half variation selection table obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and prepared (step A399), and the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (holding number 1) is performed. The variable pattern random number 2 is loaded from (for) and prepared (step A400). Then, the distribution process (step A401) is performed, the latter half variable number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired, and the latter half variable number area is saved (step A402). By this process, the latter half fluctuation pattern is set.

Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A403), and the table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and 2 (including the determined second half fluctuation number) (step A404). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A405), and the random number is loaded and prepared from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of hold 1) (step A406). ). After that, the distribution process (step A407) is performed, the first half variation number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the first half variation number area (step A408), and the variation pattern setting process is completed. By this process, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set.

In this way, in the setting of the fluctuation pattern that defines the execution mode and the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game, the fluctuation distribution information 2 in consideration of the current production mode is used, and the fluctuation pattern according to the production mode is used. It can be set. That is, the game control device 100 sets the execution mode of the variable display game including at least the variable time of the variable display game according to the effect mode set by the effect mode control means (game control device 100, see FIG. 49). It serves as an execution mode setting means.

[2-byte distribution processing]
FIG. 37 shows a 2-byte distribution process (step A398) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the latter half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the latter half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the first data of the latter half variation group table (selection table) prepared in the variation pattern setting process is a code without distribution (that is, "0") (step A411). ). Here, the latter half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one latter half fluctuation pattern group, but the latter half that defines only the latter half fluctuation pattern group in which the latter half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the variable group table (for example, some variable group tables when the result is out of order), there is no need for distribution, so the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning. ..

Then, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is a code without distribution (step A412; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A417), and the 2-byte distribution process is completed. To do. On the other hand, when the first data of the latter half variable group table is not a code without distribution (step A412; N), one distribution value first specified in the latter half variable group table is acquired (step A413).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A413 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) loaded in step A397 (step A414), and the calculation is performed. It is determined whether the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A415). If the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A415; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A416), the process shifts to step A413, and the subsequent processing is performed. Do. That is, in step A413, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the variable group selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step A415 as a new random number value, and further new disturbance. Calculate the numerical value (step A414). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A415).

The above process is executed in step A415 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A415; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation selection tables is selected from at least one latter half fluctuation selection table defined in the latter half fluctuation group table. Then, in step A415, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A415; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A417), and the 2-byte distribution process is performed. To finish.

[Distribution processing]
FIG. 38 shows the distribution processing (steps A401, A407) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing. In the distribution process, the second half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is selected from the second half fluctuation selection table (second half fluctuation pattern group) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 2, or the first half fluctuation selection table (first half fluctuation selection table) based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. This is a process for selecting the first half fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation pattern group).

In this sorting process, first, it is checked whether or not the first data of the prepared second half variable selection table (selection table) and the first half variable selection table (selection table) is a code without sorting (that is, "0"). (Step A421). Here, the latter half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table store a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation pattern or the first half fluctuation pattern, as in the latter half fluctuation group table, but distribution is necessary. In the case of a selection table without a distribution value, the distribution value "0", that is, the code without distribution is specified at the beginning.

Then, when the data at the head of the second half variation selection table or the first half variation selection table is a code without distribution (step A422; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A427), and the data is distributed. End the process. On the other hand, when the data at the beginning of the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is not a code without distribution (step A422; N), the first distribution value specified in the second half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table is set. (Step A423).

Subsequently, after subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A423 from the random number values loaded in steps A400 and A406 (values of fluctuation pattern random number 2 and fluctuation pattern random number 3), a new random number value is calculated (). Step A424), it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A425). Then, when the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A425; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A426), the process shifts to step A423, and thereafter. Perform processing.

That is, in step A423, after acquiring the distribution value specified next in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table, the distribution value is subtracted by using the random number value determined in step A425 as a new random number value. , Further calculate a new random number value (step A424). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A425). The above process is executed in step A425 until it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A425; Y). As a result, any one of the latter half fluctuation number and the first half fluctuation number is selected from at least one second half fluctuation pattern and the first half fluctuation pattern defined in the second half fluctuation selection table and the first half fluctuation selection table. Then, in step A425, when it is determined that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A425; Y), the data is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result (step A427), and the distribution process is completed. To do.

[Fluctuation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the variation start information setting process (step A337) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 variation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 39, in the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the random number storage areas of the target fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are cleared (step A431). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A432), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A433). Further, the latter half fluctuation time value table is set (step A434), and the latter half fluctuation time value corresponding to the latter half fluctuation number is acquired (step A435).

Then, the first half fluctuation time value and the second half fluctuation time value are added (step A436), and the added value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A437). After that, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A438), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A439), and the command setting process is performed (step A440). .. That is, the fluctuation command includes at least information on the fluctuation time, and forms the fluctuation time information for specifying the fluctuation time in the fluctuation display game. Next, the number of special symbols held corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is updated by -1 (step A441), the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variable symbol discrimination flag is set (step A442), and the random number storage area is shifted. Then (step A443), the free space after the shift is cleared to 0 (step A444).

After that, as a process for extending the stop time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game, first, the stop extension information area is cleared (step A445). When the stop symbol pattern is a detached stop symbol pattern (step A446; Y), the effect mode number is 2 (step A447; Y), and the remaining rotation speed (game number) in the effect mode is 1. (Step A448; Y) determines whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step A449).

When the special figure is not in high probability (step A449; N), the stop extension information 1 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A450), and the stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step A452). The command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the variation start information setting process is terminated. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 1 (first extended stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time (normal stop time). If the special figure is in high probability (step A449; Y), the stop extension information 2 is saved in the stop extension information area (step A451), and a stop information command corresponding to the stop extension information is prepared (step). A452), the command setting process (step A453) is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed. As a result, the stop time is set to the special figure extension display time 2 (second extension stop time) which is longer than the normal special figure display time.

When the effect mode number is 2, the effect mode 2 that can be selected when the time is shortened is set in a state in which the normal probability state or the high probability state is not clearly notified (so-called latent state). If there is. In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, the effect mode 2 is set when the normal probability state and the time saving state are set after the end of the special gaming state. In this case, the time saving state is continued until the special figure variation display game is executed 70 times, and the effect mode 2 is also continued until the special figure variation display game is executed 70 times accordingly. Has been made. Further, in some cases where the high probability state and the time saving state are set after the end of the special game state, the high probability state may be in a latent state in which the high probability state is not clearly notified, and the effect mode 2 is also set in this case. This latent state is to be continued until the special figure variation display game is executed 70 times, and the effect mode 2 is also continued until the special figure variation display game is executed 70 times accordingly. Has been done.

That is, until the special figure variation display game is executed 70 times in the effect mode 2, it is not clearly notified whether the game is in the high probability state or the normal probability state. Then, in the case of the effect mode 2 and the remaining number of rotations of the effect is 1, that is, in the 70th special figure variation display game, the first extension stop time is set in the normal probability state, and the first extension stop time is set in the high probability state. If so, the second extension stop time is set. The probability state is notified by performing the effect during this extended stop time. When the effect mode 2 is set, the effect mode 3 is set as the next mode transition information in the high probability state, and the effect mode 0 is set as the next mode transition information in the normal probability state. Therefore, the production mode shifts according to this information.

On the other hand, when the stop symbol pattern is not a detached stop symbol pattern (step A446; N), when the effect mode number is not 2 (step A447; N), or when the remaining rotation speed (game number) in the effect mode 2 is not 1. (Step A448; N) ends the fluctuation start information setting process. In this case, the extension of the stop time is not set and the normal stop time is set. In this way, the stop time of the special figure variation display game is set at the start of the special figure variation display game based on the result of the special figure variation display game, whether or not it is a specific rotation speed, and the state of the effect mode. It is supposed to be played. As a result, for example, it is possible to set a continuous effect of the fluctuation time and the stop time, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

By the above processing, the variation display start information which is the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is set. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a determination means for determining various random value values stored in the start winning prize storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variation pattern determining means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

Then, the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game is later transmitted to the effect control device 200, and the effect control device 200 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information regarding the start of the special figure variation display game. Set the detailed production contents in the decoration special figure variation display game, and start the decoration special figure variation display game. That is, the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) is executed based on the variable display start information. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a game control means for instructing the start of execution of a variable display game in which a plurality of symbols are variablely displayed on the display device 41 and then the result mode is displayed.

The information regarding the start of these special figure variation display games includes a decorative special figure hold number command including information on the number of start memories (holding number), a decorative special figure command including information on a stop symbol (result mode), and a special figure variation. Examples include a variation command including information on the variation pattern (including the variation time) of the display game and a stop information command including information on the extension of the stop time, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 200 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decorative special figure command before the variable command, the processing in the effect control device 200 can be efficiently advanced. In addition, high-priority information is sent first, and even if a command is dropped in the middle, damage can be minimized. Further, regarding the stop time, a certain stop time is set in advance, and the stop extension information is transmitted only when the stop time is extended. As a result, it is not necessary to send information about the stop time every time, and the burden of control can be reduced.

From the above, the game control means (game control device 100) determines the execution right of the variable display game as the start memory based on the winning of the game ball in the start winning area (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37). A start winning prize storage means (game control device 100) that stores up to the upper limit of the number of start prizes is provided, and a variable display game is executed based on the start memory based on the establishment of a predetermined condition. The information to be transmitted to the effect control device 200) is the information regarding the number of the start memories after being subtracted with the start of the variable display game, the information regarding the result mode of the variable display game, and the information regarding the variable time of the variable display game. It means that they are sent in order.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A304) in the above-mentioned special figure normal processing will be described. The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game, and is the same process as the process in the special figure 1 variation start process shown in FIG. 31 for the second start memory. It is done as.

As shown in FIG. 40, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A461), and the second special figure fluctuation is performed. The jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A462) for setting the missed hit flag 2 and the jackpot information for determining whether or not the display game is a jackpot is performed.

Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) related to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (symbol information), the special figure for setting the special figure information which is a parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. Special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information which is a table in which information for referring to various information regarding the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is set by performing the information setting process (step A464, see FIG. 35). Prepare the table (step A465). After that, the fluctuation pattern setting process (see step A466, FIG. 36) for setting the fluctuation pattern of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and the fluctuation start information setting process for setting the fluctuation start information of the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed. (See step A467, FIG. 39) is performed to end the special figure 2 fluctuation start process.

[Big hit flag 2 setting process]
FIG. 41 shows the jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A462) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 32 is performed for the second start memory. In this jackpot flag 2 setting process, first, the deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A471). Next, the jackpot random number is loaded and prepared from the special figure 2 jackpot random number storage area (for the number of hold 1) of RWM (step A472). The number of hold 1 is an area for storing information (random numbers, etc.) about the special figure start memory in which the digestion order is the earliest (here, the earliest in the special figure 2). After that, a jackpot determination process (step A473, see FIG. 33) is performed to determine whether or not the acquired jackpot random number value is a jackpot depending on whether or not it matches the jackpot determination value.

Then, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A473) is a jackpot (step A474; Y), the jackpot information is overwritten and saved in the jackpot flag 2 area where the loss information was saved in step A471 (step A475). ), The jackpot flag 2 setting process is completed. On the other hand, when the determination result of the jackpot determination process (step A473) is not a jackpot (step A474; N), the jackpot flag 2 setting process is terminated while saving the information that the jackpot flag 2 is out of alignment.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 42 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A463) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process. In this process, the same process as the process in the jackpot flag 1 setting process shown in FIG. 34 is performed for the second start memory. In this special figure 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A481), and if it is a big hit (step A481; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (holding number 1). Load the jackpot symbol random number from (for) (step A482). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot symbol table is set (step A483), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded jackpot symbol random number is acquired, and the stop symbol number is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A484). This process selects the type of special result.

After that, the jackpot stop symbol information table is set (step A485), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A486). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special symbol display (here, the special diagram 2 display 52) and a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the probability variation determination flag corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the probability variation determination flag area (step A487). The probability fluctuation determination flag is for setting the probability state after the end of the special game state.

Further, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A488), and the large winning opening opening information corresponding to the stopped symbol number is acquired to open the large winning opening. Save to the information area (step A489). This information is for setting the execution mode of the special gaming state. Then, a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A492).

On the other hand, when it is not a big hit (step A481; N), the stop symbol number at the time of the loss is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A490), and the loss stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step). A491), prepare a decorative special symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A492). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special figure variation display game is set.

After that, the decorative special figure command is saved in the decorative special figure command area (step A493), and the command setting process (step A494) is performed. This decorative special figure command is later transmitted to the effect control device 200. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A495), and the special figure 2 jackpot symbol random number storage area (for 1 hold number) is cleared to 0 (step A496). FIG. 2 The stop symbol setting process is terminated.

That is, the game control device 100 executes the first variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball at the first starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36), and the second starting winning opening (normal variable winning opening). It serves as a variable display game execution means for executing a second variable display game as a variable display game based on the detection of the game ball in the device 37). Further, the game control device 100 serves as a variable display game execution control means that controls the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 1)]
FIG. 43 shows a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1) (step A310) in the special figure normal process (see FIG. 29). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1" is set as the process number (step A501), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A502).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A503), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 1 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A504). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A505), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 1 display 51) is saved in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A506), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 1) is completed.

[Processing transition setting process during special figure change (Special figure 2)]
FIG. 44 shows a special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2) (step A305) in the special figure normal process (see FIG. 29). In this special figure changing process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1" is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

Then, the customer waiting demo flag area is cleared (step A513), and the signal relating to the start of fluctuation in FIG. 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). After that, the changing flag is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and the initial value (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) of the blinking control timer (timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 indicator 52) is saved in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area. For example, 200 ms) is set (step A516), and the process transition setting process during special figure change (special figure 2) is completed.

[Processing during special figure fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A10) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 45, in the special figure changing process, first, it is determined whether or not there is stop extension information (stop extension information 1 or 2) (step A601). When there is no stop extension information (step A601; N), the normal special figure display time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A602), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step A606) is performed. Is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure.

If there is stop extension information (step A601; Y), it is determined whether the stop extension information is 1 (step A603). In the case of stop extension information 1 (step A603; Y), the special figure extension display time 1 (for example, 3500 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A604), and the special figure display process transition setting process (step). A606) is performed to end the processing during display of the special figure. On the other hand, when the stop extension information is not 1 (step A603; N), that is, when the stop extension information is 2, the special figure extension display time 2 (for example, 14300 ms) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A605). Processing during special figure display The transition setting process (step A606) is performed to end the process during special figure display. That is, the game control device 100 serves as a stop time setting means for setting a stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Processing during special figure display Transition setting processing]
FIG. 46 shows a special figure display process transition setting process (step A606) in the above-mentioned special figure changing process. In this special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number "2" related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

Next, the signal related to the end of the fluctuation of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is saved in the test signal output data area (steps A613 and A614), and the symbol related to the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game for output to the external information terminal is confirmed. The initial value of the control timer (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the number-of-times signal control timer area (step A615). After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game on the special figure 1 display 51, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 1 display 51 is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A616). ), As information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52, the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step). A617), the process transition setting process during special figure change is terminated.

[Processing during special figure display]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (step A11) in the above-mentioned special figure game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the special figure display processing, first, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing is loaded (step A621), and the big hit flag 2 of the RWM is loaded. The process of clearing the area (step A622) is performed. Then, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A623), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A623; Y), the jackpot flag 1 area of the RWM is cleared (step A628), and the second special feature is The test signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special figure 2 jackpot) of the figure variation display game is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A629), and the round number upper limit value table is set (step A630).

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A623 that the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A623; N), the jackpot flag 1 set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded. (Step A624), the RWM jackpot flag 1 region is cleared (step A625). Subsequently, it is determined whether the loaded jackpot flag 1 is a jackpot (step A626), and if it is determined to be a jackpot (step A626; Y), the jackpot of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 jackpot) is determined. The test signal regarding the start is saved in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A627), and the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A630) is performed.

After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit value table (step A630), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value area of the RWM (step A631). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A632).

Next, the decorative special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded and prepared from the decorative special figure command area of the RWM (step A633), and the command setting process (step A634) is performed. After that, a probability information command related to the information that sets the probability of a hit result in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared (step A635), and the command setting process (step A635) is performed. Step A636) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special figure 1 or special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A637), and the command setting process (step A638) is prepared. )I do.

Next, the large winning opening opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning in the normal figure fluctuation display game and the special figure fluctuation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A639). After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 6000 ms or 48 ms) corresponding to the jackpot opening information is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A640). Then, the large winning opening illegal winning number area of the large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38 or second special variable winning device 39) corresponding to the large winning opening opening information is cleared (step A641), and the large winning opening is opened. The flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the fraud monitoring period flag area of the grand prize opening corresponding to the information (step A642).

Next, the special figure game mode flag is loaded (step A643), and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A644). As a result, information on the effect mode when a special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later. After that, the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A645) is performed, and the processing during special figure display is completed.

On the other hand, in step A626 of FIG. 47, when the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A626; N), the effect mode information check process (step A646) related to the setting of the effect mode is performed, and the special figure variation display is set to the time saving state. The time reduction variation number update process (step A647) for managing the number of times the game is executed is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 1 (see step A648 and FIG. 30) is performed, and the special figure display process is terminated.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 (step A645) in the above-mentioned special figure display processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A651), and the processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A652).

Next, the signal relating to the start of the jackpot (special game state) is saved in the external information output data area (step A653), and the signal relating to the end of the high probability state and the time saving state is saved in the test signal output data area (step A654). .. After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special game state is cleared (step A655), the number in the low probability is saved in the game state display number area (step A656), and the normal game mode. Save the flag with low probability of Fuzu & no support for Fuden in the flag area (step A657).

Then, the variable symbol discrimination flag area is cleared (step A658), and the high probability notification flag area is cleared in order to turn off the game state display LED (third game state display unit 59) related to the display of the high probability state (step A658). Step A659), save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A660). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery, which saves the command output to the effect control device 200 at the time of power failure recovery (step A661). Clear the time reduction variation frequency area for managing the number of games (step A662). As a result, the high probability state and the time saving state are terminated, and the normal probability state and the normal operation state are set.

After that, the number of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode number area (step A663), and the effect remaining rotation speed area is cleared (step A664). Then, the non-updated code is saved in the next mode transition information area (step A665), the command of the effect mode 1 is saved in the effect mode command area (step A666), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting process 1 is terminated. .. As a result, the information on the effect mode is temporarily cleared when the special game state occurs.

Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (step A646) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. Conventionally, in a game machine that executes a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed based on a winning of a game ball to a starting winning opening, a game control device that comprehensively controls the game and the game control device It is equipped with a production control device that controls the production in response to the instructions of. In such a gaming machine, there is known a gaming machine that transitions a plurality of production modes having different production contents in order to enhance the interest of the game. In conventional gaming machines, the production mode is managed by the production control device, but the fluctuation pattern of the fluctuation display game (variation time, presence / absence of reach, etc.) is determined by the game control device, so this must be followed. However, even if the production mode was changed, the display content was only changed.

Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, a variable display game in which a plurality of identification information is variablely displayed is executed based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening, and the game is played when the result of the variable display game becomes a special result mode. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that imparts a predetermined game value to a person, the game control device 100 manages the effect mode for the purpose of expanding the range of the effect and enhancing the interest of the game.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present embodiment, five modes 0 to 4 are prepared as the effect modes, and these transitions are managed by the game control device 100. When setting each effect mode, the remaining number of rotations of the effect, which is the information on the number of times the special figure variation display game that maintains the effect mode is executed, and the next mode transition information, which is the information on the effect mode to be shifted to the next, are set. Then, the production mode is changed accordingly. In addition, the effect mode may be set when the special game state ends.

In the effect mode 0 (effect mode number is 0) and the effect mode 1 (effect mode number is 1), which can be selected in the normal probability state and not in the time saving state, the remaining number of rotations of the effect is a predetermined number of times (15, 30, 60, etc.). Is set, and the effect mode 1 or the effect mode 0 is set so as to alternately shift to each other's effect modes as the next mode transition information.

In addition, the effect mode 2 (the so-called latent state), which is set when the time is shortened in the normal probability state or the high probability state but not clearly notified (so-called latent state), is set when the end of the special game state is set. In the effect mode number 2), 70 is set as the effect remaining rotation speed, and the effect mode 1 is set as the next mode transition information in the normal probability state, and the effect mode 3 is set in the high probability state.

In addition, when the end of the special game state is set as an opportunity to clearly notify that the state is in a high probability state, the effect mode 3 (effect mode number 3) or the effect mode 4 (effect mode number 4) is set. Set. Which effect mode is set is determined by the type of special result mode, the result of the preliminary determination, and the like. The production mode 3 is a production mode that continues until the next special result mode is derived. The remaining rotation speed of the production is not set because it is indefinite, and the production mode to be transferred to the next is also indefinite, so the next mode transition information is not updated. Is set. Further, in the effect mode 4, 4 is set as the effect remaining rotation speed, and the effect mode 3 is set as the next mode transition information.

In the following effect mode information check process, the transition of the effect mode according to the number of executions of the special figure variation display game is controlled, and the transition of the effect mode triggered by the special game state is the jackpot end process (FIG. 65). Is controlled.

[Production mode information check processing]
As shown in FIG. 49, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A671). If the next mode transition information is a non-update code (step A671; Y), the effect mode information check process ends. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of times the special figure variation display game is executed, for example, when the effect mode 3 that continues until the next big hit is selected in a high probability state. Yes, this effect mode 3 forms a specific effect mode that can be set at least during a high probability state. In this case, the remaining number of rotations of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game for maintaining the effect mode 3 is executed, is not set.

If the next mode transition information is not a non-update code (step A671; N), the remaining number of rotations of the effect, which is the number of times the special figure variation display game can be executed until the effect mode is changed, is updated by -1 (step A672). , It is determined whether or not the remaining rotation speed of the effect is 0 (step A673). When the remaining number of rotations of the effect becomes 0 (step A673; Y), that is, when the effect mode is changed from the next special figure variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A674), and the next mode shifts. Acquire the address of the table corresponding to the information (step A675).

Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (step A676), and the effect remaining rotation speed of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step). A677), the next mode transition information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A678). Here, when the effect mode to be transferred is the above-mentioned specific effect mode (effect mode 3), the remaining effect rotation speed is not set, and the next mode transition information is set to the non-update code. .. After that, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A679), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A680), the command setting process (step A681) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is performed. finish.

On the other hand, when the remaining production speed is not 0 (step A673; N), that is, when the current production mode continues in the next special figure variation display game, the remaining production speed is the specified rotation speed (for example, 8 times). It is determined whether or not there is (step A682). If the remaining rotation speed of the effect is not the specified rotation speed (step A682; N), the effect mode information check process ends. When the remaining rotation speed of the effect is the specified rotation speed (step A682; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A683), the command setting process (step A684) is performed, and the effect mode information check process is performed. finish. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of notifying the switching before the specified number of rotations for switching the effect mode. By managing the effect mode with the game control device 100 in this way, it is possible to control, for example, to generate a specific reach only in a specific effect mode, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as an effect mode control means for selecting and setting one of the effect modes from a plurality of effect modes having different execution modes of the effect. Further, the game control device 100 serves as an effect mode continuation number setting means for setting the execution number of the variable display game that maintains the set effect mode. Further, the game control device 100 serves as a management means for managing the remaining number of executions of the variable display game that maintains the effect mode.

According to the above processing, the effect mode can be changed by the game control device 100 that determines the execution mode of the special figure variation display game, so that the length of the variation time can be changed according to each effect mode. It is possible to expand the range of production and enhance the interest of the game. Further, for example, it is possible to surely generate a reach in a special figure variation display game in which a reach is desired to be generated, and it is possible to enhance the interest of the game. In addition, by making it possible for the game control device 100 to manage the remaining number of executions of the special figure variation display game that maintains the set production mode, it is possible to produce effects such as different fluctuation times according to the remaining number of times. It is possible to expand the range of games and enhance the interest of the game. Furthermore, even if the remaining number of executions of the special figure variation display game in a specific production mode is indefinite, such as setting a specific production mode until the next special result occurs, the range of production can be expanded. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.

From the above, based on the winning of the game ball to the winning opening (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37), a variable display game that displays a plurality of identification information in a variable manner is executed, and the result of the variable display game is special. In a game machine that generates a special game state that gives a player a predetermined game value when the result mode is reached, the effect content is determined based on the game control device 100 that controls the game and the control data from the game control device 100. The game control device 100 includes an effect control device 200 for controlling, and the game control device 100 includes an effect mode control means (game control device 100) that selects and sets one of the effect modes from a plurality of effect modes having different execution modes of the effect. The execution mode setting means (game control device 100) for setting the execution mode of the variable display game including at least the variable time of the variable display game according to the effect mode set by the effect mode control means. It will be. Here, the execution mode of the variable display game may include at least the variable time, and may include the presence / absence of reach, the length of the stop time, and the like.

Further, the effect mode control means (game control device 100) includes the effect mode continuation number setting means (game control device 100) for setting the number of times the variable display game is executed to maintain the set effect mode, and the effect mode maintaining the effect mode. It is provided with a management means (game control device 100) for managing the remaining number of executions of the display game.

Further, the game control device 100 is a probability setting means (game control device 100) capable of setting a high probability state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes the special result mode is higher than the normal probability state after the end of the special game state. ), The probability setting means maintains the high probability state until the next special result mode is derived when the high probability state is set, and the effect mode control means (game control device 100) is at least in the high probability state. It is possible to set a specific effect mode, and the effect mode continuation number setting means (game control device 100) sets the specific effect mode when the specific effect mode is set based on the high probability state. It means that the number of executions of the variable display game to be maintained is not set.

[Time reduction fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, the details of the time reduction fluctuation number update process (step A647) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 50, in the time reduction fluctuation number update process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure has a high probability (high probability state) (step A691). When the special figure has a high probability (step A691; Y), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure is not in the high probability (step A691; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure time reduction (time reduction state) is in progress (step A692).

If the special time is not shortened (step A692; N), the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the special figure time reduction is in progress (step A692; Y), the time reduction variation number for managing the number of executions of the special figure variation display game in the time reduction state is updated by -1 (step A693), and the time reduction variation number is updated. Is determined to be 0 (step A694). If the time reduction variation number is not 0 (step A694; N), that is, if the time reduction state continues even in the next special figure variation display game, the time reduction variation number update process is terminated. Further, when the number of time reduction fluctuations is 0 (step A694; Y), that is, when the time reduction state ends in the special figure variation display game this time, a probability information command (time reduction end) is prepared (step A695). The command setting process (step A696) is performed. After that, the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of the time reduction) is performed (step A697), and the time reduction variation number update process is completed.

[Special figure Normal processing transition setting processing 2 (at the end of time reduction)]
FIG. 51 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of the time reduction) (step A697) in the above-mentioned time reduction variation number update process. In this special figure normal processing transition setting process 2 (at the end of the time reduction), first, the signal related to the end of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A701), and the signal related to the end of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step A702).

Next, the low-probability number is saved in the game state display number area (step A703), and the low-probability & non-supported flag is saved in the normal-figure game mode flag area (step A704). Further, the special figure low probability & no time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A705), and the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A706). Ends the normal process transition setting process 2 (at the end of the reduced time).

Here, the types of special results and the opening / closing pattern of the large winning opening (special variable winning device) in the gaming machine of the present embodiment will be described. Four types of special results are set: 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation, 11R normal variation, and 16R probability variation. The 2R probability variation, 11R probability variation, and 16R probability variation have 2, 11, and 16 rounds in the special game state, respectively, and the probability state is set to the high probability state until the next special result is derived after the end of the special game state. This is a special result that is considered to be a time saving condition. In addition, 11R is usually 11 rounds in the special gaming state, the probability state after the end of the special gaming state is set to the normal probability state, and a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times) of the special figure variation display game. It is a special result that the time is shortened until the execution of.

Further, the gaming machine of the present embodiment is provided with a lower grand prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) and an upper grand winning opening (second special variable winning device 39), and a plurality of opening / closing patterns are prepared for each. .. Then, one opening / closing pattern is selected from these plurality of opening / closing patterns according to the type of special result. In the following opening / closing pattern, the value shown as the opening time of the large winning opening indicates the maximum opening time, and when a predetermined number of game balls flow into the large winning opening before the maximum opening time elapses in one round. Closes the big prize opening without waiting for the maximum opening time to elapse and the round ends.

FIG. 52 shows the opening / closing pattern of the upper prize opening (second special variable winning device 39). The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 52A is selected when the special result is a 2R probability variation and the time is not shortened when the special result is derived. In the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 1, 52 ms opening time is set in the first round (1R), and 52 ms opening time is set in the next round (2R) after an interval time of 1448 ms is inserted. Then, after the lapse of the ending time of 22400 ms, the special gaming state ends.

The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 52B is selected when the special result is a 2R probability variation and the time is shortened when the special result is derived. The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 has the same opening / closing mode as the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern, but the ending time is 1400 ms. The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 52 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variations. In the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 3, 16 rounds in which the opening time of 52 ms is set are performed with an interval time of 1448 ms, and the special gaming state ends after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses.

The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4 shown in FIG. 52 (d) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variations. In the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4, in the first round (1R), the opening of 52 ms is first performed 16 times with a closing time of 1448 ms, as in the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3. Up to this point, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, and the effect on the display device 41 or the like is the same, making it difficult for the player to recognize which opening / closing pattern. After that, at the closing time of 6300 ms, the promotion image is displayed on the display device 41 to notify that it is the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 4, and 26168 ms is opened to end the first round. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 15 times with an interval time of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The upper prize opening opening / closing pattern 5 shown in FIG. 52 (e) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variations. In the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5, in the first round (1R), the opening is first performed by 52 ms, then the opening is performed by 26948 ms with a closing time of 5948 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 15 times with an interval time of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

FIG. 53 shows the opening / closing pattern of the lower large winning opening (first special variable winning device 38). The lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 1 shown in FIG. 53A is selected when the special result is 11R probability variation or 11R normal. In this lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 1, in the first round (1R), the opening is first performed for 200 ms, then the opening is performed for 28,000 ms with a closing time of 5800 ms, and the first round is completed. After the end of the first round, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 10 times with an interval time of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 2 shown in FIG. 53 (b) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variations. In this lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 2, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 and 3 until the end of the 11th round. It is difficult to recognize whether it is an opening / closing pattern. After the end of the 11 rounds, the round in which the open time of 200 ms is set with an interval time of 1500 ms is repeated 5 times, and after the ending time of 1400 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

The lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 shown in FIG. 53 (c) is selected corresponding to some special results among a plurality of special results that are 16R probability variations. In this lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3, the opening / closing mode is the same as that of the lower winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 and 2 until the end of the 11th round, and the effect on the display device 41 or the like is the same. It is difficult to recognize whether it is an opening / closing pattern. Then, after the end of the 11th round, the promotion image is displayed on the display device 41 at the interval time of 13000 ms to notify that the lower prize opening opening / closing pattern 3 is established. After that, the round in which the opening time of 27,000 ms is set is repeated 5 times with an interval time of 2000 ms in between, and after the ending time of 6000 ms elapses, the special gaming state ends.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing (step A12) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 54, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special game state is updated by +1 (step A751), and the large winning opening opening information is the upper large winning opening (second special variable winning device 39). It is determined whether the opening / closing patterns are 1 to 3 (step A752).

When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (steps A752; Y), the control pointers (S (start value), E (end value) corresponding to the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are (Value))) is set (step A759), and the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. By setting the start value and the end value of this control pointer, it is possible to set the opening and closing of the big winning opening in one round and the time thereof based on the big winning opening control table. In addition, in the case of the upper prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3, since the execution time of one round is short, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state instead of each round. Do not send round commands corresponding to the number. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 (step A752; N), a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A753), and the command setting process is performed. (Step A754) is performed.

After that, it is determined whether the round to be started is the first round (1R) (step A755), and if it is the first round (step A755; Y), the big winning opening opening information is the lower big winning opening (first special). Variable winning device 38) It is determined whether or not the opening / closing pattern is used (step A756). When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A756; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step). A760), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. Further, when the large winning opening opening information is not the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A756; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757).

When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 are set. (Step A758), the process proceeds to step A770 of FIG. 55. Further, when the large winning opening opening / closing information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 4 (step A757; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the first round (1R) of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern 5 are set. Then, the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. 55 (step A761).

On the other hand, when the started round is not the first round (1R) (step A755; N), it is determined whether the started round is 2 to 11 rounds (step A762), and the started round is 2 to 11 In the case of a round (step A762; Y), it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A763). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A763; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 2nd to 11th rounds of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (steps). A764), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A763; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG.

If the starting round is not 2 to 11 rounds (step A762; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A766). Then, when the large winning opening opening / closing information is the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A766; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the second and subsequent rounds of the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern are set (step). A765), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. When the large winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A766; N), it is determined whether the large winning opening opening information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767).

When the large winning opening opening / closing information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; Y), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round or later of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 are set (step). A768), the process proceeds to step A770 in FIG. 55. If the large winning opening opening / closing information is not the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 2 (step A767; N), the control pointers (S, E) corresponding to the 12th round or later of the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern 3 are set (S, E). Step A769), the process proceeds to step A770 of FIG. 55.

In step A770 of FIG. 55, the set start value (S) of the control pointer is saved in the jackpot medium control pointer area (step A770), and the set end value (E) of the control pointer is set to the jackpot medium control pointer upper limit value region. Save (step A771). Then, the solenoid information setting process (step A772) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the large winning opening opening information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A773).

When the large winning opening opening information is the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A773; Y), the large winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is performed (step A774), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. If the large winning opening opening information is not the lower winning opening opening / closing pattern (step A773; N), the large winning opening opening process transition setting process 2 is performed (step A775), and the fanfare / interval processing is terminated. By the above processing, any of the opening / closing patterns shown in FIGS. 52 and 53 is set.

[Solenoid information setting process]
FIG. 56 shows the solenoid information setting process (step A772) in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In this solenoid information setting process, first, the big winning opening control address table is set (step A781), and the address of the big winning opening control table corresponding to the jackpot medium control pointer is acquired (step A782). After that, the output data is acquired and saved in the big winning opening solenoid output data area (step A783), the opening / closing time value is acquired and the special figure game processing timer area is saved (step A784), and the solenoid information setting process is completed. To do. By this process, the opening and closing of the big winning opening and the time thereof are set.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 1]
FIG. 57 shows the process transition setting process 1 (step A774) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the process transition setting process 1 during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step A791), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A792). After that, the signal relating to the opening start of the lower winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A793), and the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the winning opening is cleared (step A794). .. Then, the lower special winning opening control flag is saved in the large winning opening determination flag area (step A795), and the large winning opening opening process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening Transition setting process 2]
FIG. 58 shows the process transition setting process 2 (step A775) during the opening of the large winning opening in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval process. In the process transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening, first, the processing number is set to "4" related to the processing during the opening of the large winning opening (step A801), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area. (Step A802). After that, the signal regarding the start of opening of the upper winning opening is saved in the test signal output data area (step A803), and the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the winning opening is cleared (step A804). .. Then, the upper prize opening control flag is saved in the large winning opening determination flag area (step A805), and the processing transition setting process 2 during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Processing while opening the big prize opening]
Next, the details of the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A13) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 59, in the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, first, the control pointer during the big hit is updated by +1 (step A811), and it is determined whether the value of the control pointer has reached the value in the control pointer upper limit value region (step A811). Step A812).

When the value of the control pointer does not reach the value in the control pointer upper limit value region (step A812; N), the solenoid information setting process (step A819, see FIG. 56) is performed. As a result, the opening / closing mode of the large winning opening according to the updated control pointer is set. Then, the process transition setting process 3 for opening the large winning opening is performed (step A820), and the processing during opening of the large winning opening is completed. As shown in FIG. 61, in the process transition setting process 3 during the opening of the large winning opening, the processing number is set to “4” related to the processing during opening of the large winning opening (step A841), and the processing number is set to the special figure game processing number area. Save (step A842), and end the process transition setting process 3 during the opening of the large winning opening.

Returning to FIG. 59, when the value of the control pointer reaches the value in the control pointer upper limit value region (step A812; Y), the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening short opening pattern (upper winning opening opening pattern 1). ~ 3) is determined (step A813). When the large winning opening opening information is the upper winning opening short opening pattern (step A813; Y), the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A818) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed. In this case, a series of images are displayed from the start to the end of the special game state, and the interval command and the ending command are not transmitted.

Further, when the large winning opening opening information is not the upper winning opening short opening pattern (step A813; N), the current number of rounds in the executing special game state and the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region are used. To determine if the current round is the final round (step A814). If it is not the final round (step A814; N), an interval command related to the interval between rounds is prepared (step A815), a command setting process (step A817) is performed, and a large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting process (step A817) is performed. Step A818) is performed to end the processing during the opening of the large winning opening. Further, in the case of the final round (step A814; Y), an ending command related to display control of the ending display screen at the end of the special game state is prepared (step A816), and a command setting process (step A817) is performed. Then, the process for setting the transition to the remaining ball processing of the large winning opening (step A818) is performed, and the processing during the opening of the large winning opening is completed.

[Large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 60 shows the large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing (step A818) in the above-mentioned processing during opening of the large winning opening. In this large winning opening remaining ball processing transition setting processing, first, the processing number is set to "5" related to the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A831), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A831). Step A832). After that, the large winning opening remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms), which is the time required for the remaining ball processing, is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A833). Then, in order to close the opening / closing door 38c of the first special variable winning device 38 or the movable member 39c of the second special variable winning device 39, the off-data for turning off the large winning opening solenoid 38b or 39b is input to the large winning opening solenoid. Saved in the output data area (step A834), and the process of setting the transition to the remaining ball processing of the large winning opening is completed.

[Treatment of remaining balls in the winning opening]
Next, the details of the large winning opening remaining ball processing (step A14) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 62, in the large winning opening remaining ball processing, first, the current number of rounds in the running special game state is compared with the round number upper limit value in the RWM round number upper limit value region, and the current round is calculated. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A851).

If the current round in the special game state is not the final round (step A851; N), the interval time corresponding to the number of rounds this time and the information on opening the large winning opening is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A852). ), Fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A853) is performed to end the processing of the remaining balls in the large winning opening. As the interval time, the time corresponding to the number of rounds this time and the information on opening the large winning opening (for example, 68 ms if the upper winning opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are used) is set. The interval period between rounds is the period from the end of the round to the elapse of the large winning opening remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) and the elapse of the large winning opening remaining ball processing time to the elapse of the interval time. For example, if the upper prize opening opening / closing patterns 1 to 3 are used, it will be 1448 ms.

On the other hand, when the current round in the special game state is the final round (step A851; Y), the game mode flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag evacuation area that stores the effect mode when the special result is derived. (Step A854). Then, the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag and the big winning opening opening information is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A855), and the big hit end processing transition setting processing (step A856) is performed to perform the big winning opening remaining ball. End the process.

In the ending period from the end of the final round to the end of the special gaming state, the large winning opening remaining ball processing time (for example, 1380 ms) elapses from the end of the final round, and further, the ending time from the elapse of the large winning opening remaining ball processing time. Is the period until the elapse of. For example, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern selected when the special result is a 2R probability variation and is not in the time saving state when the special result is derived, that is, when the effect mode is selected other than the time saving state when the special result is derived. If it is 1, the ending time is 21020 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 22400 ms in addition to the 1380 ms spent as the remaining ball processing time of the large winning opening before this ending time, and the ending effect is executed by the display device 41 or the like during this ending period. In addition, the upper prize opening opening / closing pattern selected when the special result is a 2R probability variation and is in the time saving state when the special result is derived, that is, when the effect mode is selected in the time saving state when the special result is derived. If it is 2, the ending time is 20 ms. Therefore, the length of the ending period is 1400 ms, including 1380 ms, which is spent as the remaining ball processing time of the large winning opening before this ending time.

[Fanfare / Interval processing Transition setting processing 2]
FIG. 63 shows the fanfare / inter-interval processing transition setting processing 2 (step A853) in the above-mentioned large winning opening remaining ball processing. In the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2, first, the processing number “3” related to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A861), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step). A862).

Next, the signal regarding the end of opening of the lower grand prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A863), and the upper grand winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is opened. The end signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step A864). Then, the large winning opening discrimination flag area is cleared (step A865), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 2 is completed.

[Big hit end processing transition setting processing]
FIG. 64 shows the jackpot end processing transition setting processing (step A856) in the above-mentioned jackpot remaining ball processing. In this jackpot end processing transition setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the jackpot end process (step A871), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A872). After that, the signal regarding the end of opening of the lower grand prize opening (first special variable winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A873), and the opening of the upper grand winning opening (second special variable winning device 39) is completed. The signal for is saved in the test signal output data area (step A874).

Next, the information in the large winning opening count area for storing the number of winnings in the large winning opening is cleared (step A875), and the information in the round number area for storing the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (step A876). ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area for storing the upper limit value of the number of rounds in the special game state (step A877). Then, the information in the round number upper limit value information area for storing the flag for determining the upper limit value of the number of rounds is cleared (step A878), and the flag for storing the opening information determination for the large winning opening is stored in the large winning opening opening information area. The information is cleared (step A879), and the information in the jackpot middle control pointer area for setting the opening / closing mode of the jackpot is cleared (step A880). After that, the jackpot middle control pointer upper limit value area for storing the end value of the jackpot middle control pointer is cleared (step A881), the jackpot discrimination flag area is cleared (step A882), and the jackpot end processing transition setting process is completed. To do.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, the details of the jackpot end processing (step A15) in the above-mentioned special figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in this jackpot end process, first, the probability fluctuation determination flag set based on the type of the special result that triggered the execution of the special game state is highly probable after the end of the special game state. It is determined whether the data is high-probability data set when the state is reached (step A901).

If the data is not high-probability data (step A901; N), the jackpot end setting process 1 is performed (step A902), and if the data is high-probability data (step A901; Y), the jackpot end setting process 2 is performed (step A903). ), The probability information command corresponding to the special figure game mode flag is prepared (step A904), and the command setting process (step A905) is performed.

Next, as a process of saving the information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control device 100, first, the effect mode information setting table corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A906). Then, with reference to the set effect mode information setting table, the effect mode number of the effect mode (effect mode 2, 3 or 4) set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area. (Step A907). Further, the remaining effect rotation speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect remaining rotation speed area (step A908), and the mode shifts to the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state. The information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A909).

Here, when the effect mode to be shifted is the effect mode 2, 70 is set as the effect remaining rotation speed, and as the next mode transition information, the effect mode 1 is set in the normal probability state, and the effect mode 3 is set in the high probability state. Set. Further, when the effect mode to be transferred is the effect mode 3 forming the above-mentioned specific effect mode, the remaining effect rotation speed is not set, and the next mode transition information is set to the non-update code. When the effect mode to be shifted is the effect mode 4, 4 is set as the effect remaining rotation speed, and the effect mode 3 is set as the next mode transition information.

After that, a command corresponding to the new effect mode number is prepared (step A910), the command is saved in the effect mode command area (step A911), and the command setting process (step A912) is performed. Then, the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 is performed (step A913), and the jackpot end process is completed.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 66 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A902) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 1, first, the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the external information output data area (step A921), and the signal related to the start of the time reduction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A922).

Next, the Fuzu high probability & Fuden support flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step A923), and the special figure low probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A924). After that, the probability information command (time reduction) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A925), the time reduction fluctuation number initial value (for example, 70) is saved in the time reduction fluctuation number area (step A926), and the jackpot ends. The setting process 1 is terminated.

By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes the normal probability state and the time saving state. Further, by setting the time saving fluctuation number initial value (for example, 70) in the time saving fluctuation number region, the time saving state is terminated by executing the special figure variation display game for a predetermined number of times (for example, 70 times).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 67 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A903) in the jackpot end process described above. In the jackpot end setting process 2, first, the signal related to the high probability start is saved in the external information output data area (step A931), and the signal related to the high probability start is saved in the test signal output data area (step A932).

Next, the Fuzu high probability & Fuden support flag is saved in the Fuzu game mode flag area (step A933), and the special figure high probability & time saving flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A934). After that, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery (step A935), the time reduction fluctuation frequency area is cleared (step A936), and the jackpot end setting process 2 is terminated. By the above processing, after the end of the special game state, the probability state of the special figure variation display game becomes a high probability state, and the time is shortened until the next special result mode is derived.

That is, the game control device 100 provides a probability setting means capable of setting a high probability state in which the probability that the result of the variable display game becomes the special result mode is higher than the normal probability state after the end of the special game state. When the high-probability state is set, the setting means maintains the high-probability state until the next derivation of the special result mode. Further, after the end of the special game state, the game control device 100 can generate a specific game state (time saving state) in which the period in which the normal variable winning device 37 is opened is extended for a predetermined period of time. It serves as a state generation control means.

[Special figure normal processing transition setting processing 3]
FIG. 68 shows the special figure normal process transition setting process 3 (step A913) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In the special figure normal process transition setting process 3, first, "0" is set as the process number related to the special figure normal process (step A941), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A942). ..

After that, the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the external information output data area (step A943), and the signal relating to the end of the jackpot is saved in the test signal output data area (step A944). Subsequently, the information in the probability fluctuation determination flag area is cleared (step A945), the information in the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of jackpot rounds is cleared (step A946), and the number in the game state display number area is reduced. Is saved (step A947). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the lower prize winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A948), and the fraud monitoring period flag is saved in the upper winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A949). Figure Ends the normal process transition setting process 3.

[Public map game processing]
Next, the details of the normal game processing (step S109) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt processing will be described. In the normal map game process, the input of the gate switch 34a is monitored, the entire process related to the normal map variation display game is controlled, and the normal map display is set.

As shown in FIG. 69, in the Fuzu game process, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring the input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and the Fuden winning switch for monitoring the input from the start port 2 switch 37a is performed. The monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the normal figure game processing timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step B3). The minimum value of the normal figure game processing timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the normal figure game processing timer has become 0 (step B4).

When it is determined that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is 0 (step B4; Y), that is, the time has been up or the time has already been up, the normal figure to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the normal figure game processing number. The process of setting the game sequence branch table in the register (step B5) is performed, and the process of acquiring the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the game processing number of the normal figure (step B6) is performed using the table. Then, after performing the process of saving the return address after the branch process to the stack area (step B7), the game branch process (step B8) is performed according to the game process number.

In step B8, when the game processing number is "0", the fluctuation start of the normal map fluctuation display game is monitored, and the fluctuation start setting and effect setting of the normal map fluctuation display game, and the processing during the normal map fluctuation are performed. Performs normal processing (step B9) for setting information necessary for performing. Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "1", the normal map changing process (step B10) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal map display processing is performed.

Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "2", if the result of the normal map variation display game is a hit, the normal power opening time can be set according to whether or not the time is shortened. Performs the normal map display process (step B11) for setting information necessary for performing the normal map hitting process. Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "3", the processing during the normal drawing is continued, or the information necessary for performing the processing for the remaining spheres of the normal power is set. Step B12) is performed.

Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "4", the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B13) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing end processing is performed. Further, in step B8, when the game processing number is "5", the normal drawing end processing (step B14) for setting the information necessary for performing the normal drawing normal processing (step B9) is performed.

After that, after preparing the normal symbol fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B15), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the normal symbol display (step B16). ) To end the normal map game processing. On the other hand, if it is determined in step B4 that the value of the normal figure game processing timer is not 0 (step B4; N), that is, the time is not up, the process shifts to step B15 and the subsequent processes are performed.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the gate switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 70, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, when there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is acquired and it is determined whether or not the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B102).

When the number of reserved normal figures is less than the upper limit (step B102; Y), the number of reserved normal figures is updated by +1 (step B103), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated number of reserved normal figures is calculated. (Step B104). Then, the hit random number is extracted and saved in the hit random number storage area of the RWM (step B105), and the gate switch monitoring process is completed.

Further, when it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or when it is determined in step B102 that the number of reserved figures is not less than the upper limit value (step B102; N). Ends the gate switch monitoring process.

[Public winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the Fuden winning switch monitoring process in the above-mentioned Fuzu game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 71, in the normal fluctuation winning switch monitoring process, first, the normal fluctuation display game is in the hit state, and the normal fluctuation prize device 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times. It is determined whether or not there is (step B121). Then, in the case of hitting the normal drawing (step B121; Y), it is determined whether or not there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122), and there is an input in the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; Y). If it is determined, the count number of the general electric counter is updated by +1 (step B123).

Next, when it is determined whether the count number of the updated general electric counter has reached the upper limit value (for example, 9) (step B124), and it is determined that the count number has reached the upper limit value (step B124; Y). , The pointer (value at the end of hitting) is loaded from the upper limit value area of the control pointer during hitting the normal figure (step B125). Then, the loaded pointer is saved in the control pointer area during hitting the normal figure (step B126), the normal figure game processing timer is cleared (step B127), and the normal power winning switch monitoring process is completed. That is, if there is a winning prize of the upper limit or more during the hitting state of the normal figure, the value of the hitting end is saved in the processing control pointer area during the hitting of the normal figure at that time, and the hitting state of the normal figure is in the middle. Try to finish.

Further, when it is determined in step B121 that the normal drawing is not hit (step B121; N), when it is determined in step B122 that there is no input to the start port 2 switch 37a (step B122; N) or step B124. If it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit value (step B124; N), the general electric winning switch monitoring process is terminated.

[Usually processing]
Next, the details of the normal drawing normal processing (step B9) in the above-mentioned normal drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 72, in the normal drawing normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal figure holding number is 0 (step B131), and when the normal figure holding number is 0 (step B131; Y), it is normal. Figure Normal process Transition setting process 1 (step B152) is performed, and the normal figure normal process is completed. If the number of holdings of the normal figure is not 0 (step B131; N), the winning random number is loaded from the random number storage area per normal figure (for the number of holdings 1) of the RWM (step B132), and in the normal figure variation display game. It is determined whether the probability of a hit result is a higher probability than usual, that is, whether the time is shortened (step B133).

When it is not in the high probability of the normal figure (step B133; N), it is determined whether the value of the hit random number matches the low probability judgment value which is the judgment value in the low probability of the normal figure (step B134). When the value of the hit random number does not match the low probability judgment value (step B134; N), the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), and the deviation stop symbol number is set in the normal figure stop symbol (step). B136), the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) per normal figure is cleared to 0 (step B141). On the other hand, when the value of the hit random number matches the low probability determination value (step B134; Y), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol number is set in the normal figure stop symbol. (Step B140), the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) per normal figure is cleared to 0 (step B149).

Further, in step B133, when the normal probability is high (step B133; Y), the value of the hit random number is the high probability lower limit determination which is the lower limit value in the plurality of consecutive judgment values used when the normal figure is high probability. If it is determined whether the value is less than the value (step B137) and the value of the hit random number is not less than the high probability lower limit judgment value (step B137; N), a plurality of consecutive determinations that the value of the hit random number is used when the probability is high. It is determined whether or not it is larger than the high probability upper limit determination value, which is the upper limit value in the value (step B138).

If the value of the hit random number is not larger than the high probability upper limit judgment value (step B138; N), that is, if it is a hit, the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B139), and the hit stop symbol hits the normal figure stop symbol. A number is set (step B140), and the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) per normal figure is cleared to 0 (step B141). Further, in step B137, when the value of the hit random number is less than the high probability lower limit determination value (step B137; Y), or in step B138, when the value of the hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step B138; Y). ), That is, in the case of deviation, the deviation information is saved in the hit flag area (step B135), the deviation stop symbol number is set in the normal figure stop symbol (step B136), and the random number storage area per normal figure (holding number 1). (For) is cleared to 0 (step B141). That is, the determination value for determining the hit of the normal figure by matching the values of the hit random numbers is one value at the time of low probability of the normal figure, and is a plurality of consecutive values at the time of high probability of the normal figure.

After clearing the random number storage area (for 1 hold number) to 0 (step B141), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B142). Then, a decorative pattern variation pattern command corresponding to the stop symbol is prepared (step B143), and a command setting process (step B144) is performed. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect corresponding to the normal map variation display game on the display device 41 or the like.

After that, the random number storage area per normal figure is shifted (step B145), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B146), and the number of reserved normal figures is updated by -1 (step B147). That is, as the oldest normal figure holding number 1 game is executed, the order of the normal figure holding numbers 2 to 4 held after the normal figure holding number 1 is moved up one by one. I do. By this processing, the value for the number of holdings of the normal figure 2 in the random number storage area per normal figure is moved from the number of holdings of the normal figure 1 to the number of holdings of the normal figure 3 in the random number storage area per normal figure. Will be done. Then, the value for the number of reserved numbers 4 in the random number storage area per normal figure is cleared, and the number of reserved numbers is decremented by 1.

Next, it is determined whether or not the normal power is being supported (in the time saving state) (step B148), and if the normal power is not being supported (step B148; N), the fluctuation time when there is no normal power support (for example, 10 seconds). ) Is set (step B149). Further, when the normal electric power support is in progress (step B148; Y), the normal power map fluctuation time (for example, 1 second) at the time of the normal power supply support is set (step B150). Then, the process transition setting process (step B151) during the change of the normal figure is performed, and the normal process of the normal figure is terminated.

[Usually process transition setting process 1]
FIG. 73 shows the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B152) in the above-mentioned normal drawing normal processing. In this normal figure normal process transition setting process 1, first, "0" is set as the process number for shifting to the normal figure normal process (step B161), and the process number is saved in the normal figure game process number area (step). B162). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the Fuden fraud monitoring period flag area (step B163), and the normal process transition setting process 1 is terminated.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map Transition setting processing]
FIG. 74 shows the process transition setting process (step B151) during the change of the normal map in the above-mentioned normal process of the normal map. In this process transition setting process during fluctuation of the normal map, first, "1" is set as the process number for shifting to the process during the change of the normal map (step B171), and the process number is saved in the normal map game process number area (step B171). Step B172). After that, the signal related to the start of the normal map fluctuation display game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B173), and the changing flag indicating that the normal figure fluctuation display game is changing is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area. (Step B174). Then, the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 200 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the ordinary figure display, is saved in the ordinary figure blinking control timer area (step B175), and the process transition setting process during the ordinary figure change is performed. finish.

[Processing during fluctuation of general map]
Next, the details of the processing during the fluctuation of the normal map (step B10) in the above-mentioned normal map game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 75 (a), in the normal map changing process, the normal map display process transition setting process (step B180) is performed. As shown in FIG. 75 (b), in the process transition setting process during display of the normal map, first, the process number is set to "2" as the setting process for shifting to the process during display of the normal map (step B181), and the process number is set. Is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B182). After that, the normal map display time (for example, 0.6 seconds), which is the display time of the result of the normal map variation display game on the normal map display, is set (step B183), and the normal map display time is processed by the normal map game. Save to the timer area (step B184). Further, the signal relating to the end of the fluctuation of the normal map is saved in the test signal output data area (step B185), and the stop flag indicating that the normal map fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the normal map fluctuation control flag area (step B185). Step B186), the process transition setting process during display of the general map is terminated.

[Processing during display of general map]
Next, the details of the normal map display processing (step B11) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the normal map display processing, first, the hit flag (hit information or miss information) set in the normal map normal process is loaded (step B201), and the hit flag area of the RWM is cleared. (Step B202), and it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B203).

When the hit flag is not the hit information (step B203; N), the normal figure normal processing transition setting process 1 (step B212) for shifting to the normal figure normal processing is performed, and the normal figure display processing is terminated. The normal process transition setting process 1 is the process shown in FIG. 73. On the other hand, when the hit flag is hit information (step B203; Y), it is determined whether or not the normal power support is in progress (in the time saving state) (step B204).

Then, when the normal power is not supported (step B204; N), the normal power release time (for example, 100 ms) when the normal power is not supported is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B205). Furthermore, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal drawing (step B206), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) when there is no normal power support is usually saved. During figure saving, the control pointer is saved in the upper limit value area (step B207). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 in the normal operating state is set, and for example, it can be opened twice. After that, the process for setting the transition to the process for hitting the normal map (step B211) is performed to end the process for displaying the normal map.

On the other hand, when the normal power is being supported (step B204; Y), the normal power release time (for example, 1352 ms) at the time of the normal power support is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B208). Further, the hit start pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is saved in the control pointer area during normal power (step B209), and the hit end pointer value (control pointer value) at the time of normal power support is per normal figure. The medium control pointer is saved in the upper limit value area (step B210). As a result, the opening mode of the normal variable winning device 37 in the time saving state is set, and for example, it can be opened four times. After that, the process for setting the transition to the process for hitting the normal map (step B211) is performed to end the process for displaying the normal map.

[Middle processing transition setting processing per normal figure]
FIG. 77 shows the normal map hitting process transition setting process (step B211) in the above-mentioned normal map display process. In this normal figure hitting process transition setting process, first, "3" is set as the processing number for shifting to the normal figure hitting process (step B221), and the processing number is saved in the normal figure game processing number area. (Step B222). After that, the signal related to the hit of the normal map fluctuation display game and the signal related to the start of the normal electric operation are saved in the test signal output data area (step B223), and the normal electric is output to output the signal for driving (on) the general electric solenoid. The on-data is saved in the solenoid output data area (step B224).

Further, the information in the normal variable winning device 37 for storing the number of prizes in the normal variable winning device 37 is cleared (step B225), and the number of winnings for the normal variable winning device 37 during the normal variable winning device 37 is stored. Clear the information in the winning number area (step B226). Then, the flag defining the outside of the fraudulent monitoring period of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the normal electric fraud monitoring period flag area (step B227), and the process transition setting process during normal drawing is completed.

[Processing during normal drawing]
Next, the details of the normal map hitting process (step B12) in the above-mentioned normal map game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 78, in the normal drawing hitting process, first, the normal drawing hitting control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B301), and the value of the loaded normal drawing hitting control pointer is controlled during the normal drawing. It is determined whether or not the value in the pointer upper limit value region (value at the end of hitting) has been reached (step B302).

Then, when the value of the control pointer per normal figure does not reach the value in the upper limit value region of the control pointer per normal figure (step B302; N), the control pointer per normal figure is updated by +1 (step B303). The normal electric operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed to end the normal process per figure. When the value of the control pointer per normal figure reaches the value in the upper limit value area of the control pointer per normal figure (value at the end of hit) (step B302; Y), the processing control pointer per normal figure in step B303 Without performing the process of updating the area (+1), the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B304) is performed to end the normal process per figure.

[Public operation transition setting process]
FIG. 79 shows the normal electric operation transition setting process (step B304) in the above-mentioned normal process per drawing. The normal electric operation transition setting process is a process of driving and controlling the normal electric solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal variable winning device 37, and the process is branched according to the value of the control pointer. In this normal electric operation transition setting process, first, a branch process according to the value of the control pointer is performed (step B311).

If the value of the control pointer is any of 0, 3, 5, and 7, the process proceeds to step B312 to control the blockage of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer The wait time after blockage (for example, 2800 ms or 1000 ms) is saved in the normal-figure game processing timer area (step B312), and off-data is set in the normal-power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal-power solenoid 37c (step B312). Step B313), the solenoid operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is any of 1, 4, 6, and 8, the process proceeds to step B314 to control the opening of the normal variable winning device 37, so that the normal variable winning device corresponding to the control pointer is used. The normal power release time (for example, 100 ms, 5200 ms, or 1352 ms), which is the open time of 37, is saved in the normal power game processing timer area (step B314), and the normal power solenoid output is used to turn on the normal power solenoid 37c. On-data is set in the data area (step B315), and the solenoid operation transition setting process is completed.

If the value of the control pointer is any of 2 and 9, the process proceeds to step B316, the opening control of the normal variable winning device 37 is terminated, and the normal electric remaining ball processing (step B13) is performed. , "4" is set as the processing number (step B316). Then, this processing number is saved in the normal map game processing number area (step B317), and the normal electric remaining ball processing time (for example, 600 ms) is saved in the normal figure game processing timer area (step B318). After that, the off-data is saved in the normal power solenoid output data area in order to turn off the normal power solenoid 37c (step B319), and the normal power operation transition setting process is completed.

[Public electric residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the Fuden remaining ball processing (step B13) in the above-mentioned Fuzu game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 80 (a), in the normal electric remaining ball processing, the normal figure per end processing transition setting process (step B400) is performed. As shown in FIG. 80 (b), in the normal figure hit end process transition setting process, first, the process number “5” related to the normal figure hit end process is set (step B401), and the process number is used as the normal figure game process. Save to the number area (step B402).

After that, the ending time of the normal figure is saved in the game processing timer area of the normal figure (step B403), the signal regarding the end of operation of the normal variable winning device 37 is saved in the test signal output data area (step B404), and the normal variable winning device is used. Clear the normal electric count number area for counting the number of winnings in 37 (step B405). Then, the per-figure control pointer area is cleared (step B406), the per-figure control pointer upper limit value area is cleared (step B407), and the per-figure end processing transition setting process is terminated.

[End processing per drawing]
Next, the details of the per-figure end processing (step B14) in the above-mentioned futur-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 81 (a), in the normal drawing per-end processing, the normal drawing normal processing transition setting process 2 (step B500) is performed. As shown in FIG. 81 (b), in the normal figure normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the normal figure normal process is set (step B501), and the process number is set to the normal figure game process. Save to the number area (step B502).

After that, the signal regarding the end of the hit of the normal fluctuation game is saved in the test signal output data area (step B503), and the flag (flag during the fraud monitoring period) that defines the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is monitored fraudulently. Save in the period flag area (step B504), and end the normal process transition setting process 2.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, the details of the segment LED editing process (step S110) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special figure 1 hold display 54, the special figure 2 hold display 55, the normal figure hold display 56, the first game state display unit 57, and the second game state display provided in the batch display device 50 are displayed. Settings related to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the unit 58, the third game state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 are performed.

As shown in FIG. 82, in the segment LED editing process, first, a normal figure hold number table in which the display mode on the normal figure hold display is defined is set (step S501), and display data corresponding to the normal figure hold number is set. Is acquired and saved in the segment area of the normal figure hold display (step S502). Next, the special figure 1 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 1 hold display is defined is set (step S503), the display data corresponding to the special figure 1 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 1 hold display is obtained. Save to the segment area of the vessel (step S504).

After that, the special figure 2 hold number table in which the display mode on the special figure 2 hold indicator is defined is set (step S505), the display data corresponding to the special figure 2 hold number is acquired, and the special figure 2 hold indicator is obtained. Save to the segment area of (step S506). Further, a round display LED display table in which the display mode of the round display unit is defined is set (step S507), display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer is acquired, and the display data is saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S507). Step S508).

Next, the game state display table in which the display mode on the first game state display unit 57 and the second game state display unit 58 is defined is set (step S509), and the display data corresponding to the game state display number is acquired. The data is saved in the segment area of each game status display unit (step S510). After that, it is determined whether or not the high-probability notification flag related to the notification that the jackpot probability state is in the high-probability state at the time of power failure recovery is on (step S511). Then, when the high-probability notification flag is on (step S511; Y), that is, when the high-probability state is being notified, the segment LED editing process is terminated. If the high probability notification flag is not on (step S511; N), the off data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area of the third game status display unit (step S512), and the segment LED editing process is completed. To do.

Next, the magnet fraud monitoring process and the radio wave fraud monitoring process for monitoring fraudulent activity will be described. For a gaming machine that gives a player a predetermined gaming value according to the result of the gaming, a fraudulent act of illegally obtaining the gaming value may be performed. Among such fraudulent acts, a gaming machine provided with a mechanism for detecting fraudulent acts using magnets has been conventionally known. There are various types of fraudulent activity, and detection methods and conditions are required according to each type. However, the occurrence of an abnormal condition could not be detected accurately. In particular, erroneously determining that an abnormal condition has occurred even though no abnormal condition leading to fraudulent activity has occurred and giving a notification, etc., causes distrust of the player and is a factor for avoiding playing on the gaming machine. Therefore, it is important to prevent such false detection of abnormal conditions. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the occurrence of an abnormal state is accurate based on the detection results of the magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector that detects abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and the radio wave detector. The following magnet fraud monitoring process and radio wave fraud monitoring process are performed for the purpose of detecting the detector, for example, preventing erroneous detection of an abnormal state.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 that forms a magnetic detector that detects abnormal magnetism, and the start and end of fraud notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 83, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) Is on, that is, it is determined whether an abnormal magnetism is detected (step S601). When the magnet sensor is on (step S601; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer that measures the detection period of abnormal magnetism is updated by +1 to check whether the timer has timed up. Determine (step S603).

When the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period of time, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the initial value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set. It is saved in the magnet fraud notification timer area (step S605). Then, a magnet fraud notification command is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud generation flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously turned on for a certain period of time (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality has occurred.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor switch 61). Then, in the case of the magnetic detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred when abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time.

On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (step S601; N), that is, when abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud notification time is reached. If the magnet fraud notification timer that specifies is not 0, -1 is updated (step S609). The minimum value of the magnet fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610). Even when the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed up (step S603; N), the process proceeds to step S609.

Then, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S610; N), that is, when the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is terminated. Further, when the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is 0 (step S610; Y), that is, when the time is up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period ends or the fraudulent notification is sent from the beginning. If it has not been performed, a command to end the magnet fraud notification is prepared (step S611). Further, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value in the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step S613; N), the prepared magnet invalid flag is saved in the magnet invalid flag area (step S614), the command setting process is performed (step S615), and the magnet illegal monitoring process is terminated. ..

[Radio wave fraud monitoring process]
Next, the details of the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of an abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 that detects an abnormal radio wave, and the start and end of the fraudulent notification are set.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121a, the radio wave is transmitted. It is determined whether the sensor 62 is on, that is, a state in which an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). When the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is saved in the radio wave fraud notification timer area (step S702).

Then, a command for radio wave fraud notification is prepared (step S703), a radio wave fraud occurrence flag is prepared as a radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and it is determined whether the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value in the radio wave fraud flag area. (Step S709). That is, in the case of radio wave fraud, unlike the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as an abnormal state detection control means for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state based on the detection result of the radio wave detector (radio wave sensor 62). Then, in the case of a radio wave detector, it is determined that an abnormal state has occurred only once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (step S701; N), that is, when an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer that defines the radio wave fraud notification time is not 0, and the radio wave fraud notification timer is updated by -1 (step). S705). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step S706).

If the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is not 0 (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. Further, when the value of the radio wave fraud notification timer is 0 (step S706; Y), that is, when the time has been up or the time has already been up, the fraudulent notification period has expired, or the fraudulent notification has been issued from the beginning. If not, prepare a command to end the radio wave fraud notification (step S707), prepare a radio wave fraud release flag as a radio wave fraud flag (step S708), and set the prepared radio wave fraud flag to the value of the radio wave fraud flag area. Is determined (step S709).

Then, when the prepared radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the radio wave fraud monitoring process ends. If the values do not match (step S709; N), the prepared radio wave fraud flag is saved in the radio wave fraud flag area (step S710), command setting processing is performed (step S711), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process is terminated. ..

By performing the magnet fraud monitoring process and the radio wave fraud monitoring process as described above, the occurrence of an abnormal state can be accurately detected. That is, the gaming machine is equipped with a component that generates magnetism, such as a solenoid, but when magnetism is continuously detected for a predetermined period of time, it is determined to be in an abnormal state, so that the magnetism of the solenoid or the like is used. Can be prevented from being erroneously detected as an abnormal state. On the other hand, since the gaming machine is not equipped with a component that emits radio waves, damage can be minimized by immediately determining an abnormal state when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

In the present embodiment, the detection of abnormal magnetism is simply a state in which magnetism is detected, but a state in which magnetism stronger than the magnetic state in a non-abnormal state may be detected, and magnetism equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value may be detected. The detected state may be regarded as abnormal. Further, in the present embodiment, the detection of abnormal radio waves is simply set to the state of receiving radio waves, but the frequency is not received in the state of receiving strong radio waves that are not received in the non-abnormal state or in the state of not being abnormal. It may be in a state of receiving the radio wave of. Further, a state in which a radio wave having an intensity equal to or higher than a predetermined threshold value or a radio wave having a specific frequency is detected may be regarded as an abnormality. When setting the threshold value by the magnetic strength, the radio wave strength, and the frequency, the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 may output a signal when the threshold value is exceeded, or the control device side sets the threshold value. You may want to monitor whether it has been exceeded.

From the above, the detection results of the magnetic detector (magnetic sensor switch 61) that detects abnormal magnetism, the radio wave detector (radio sensor 62) that detects abnormal radio waves, and the magnetic detector and radio wave detector Based on this, an abnormal state detection control means (game control device 100) for detecting the occurrence of an abnormal state is provided, and in the case of a magnetic detector, the abnormal state detection control means continuously detects abnormal magnetism for a predetermined period of time. If this happens, it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred, but in the case of a radio wave detector, it is determined that an abnormal condition has occurred only once an abnormal radio wave is detected.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (step S113) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. The external information editing process is based on the monitoring results of the payout command transmission process (step S104), the winning opening switch / error monitoring process (step S107), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S111), and the radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S112). Then, information to be output to an external device such as an information collection terminal or a game hall internal management device or a test firing test device is created and set in an output buffer.

As shown in FIG. 85, in the external information editing process, first, the main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) for setting the information regarding the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the starting port signal for editing the winning signal of the starting port is performed. The editing process (step S802) is performed. Next, if the symbol confirmation count control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the execution count of the special figure variation display game is not 0, the number is updated by -1 (step S803). The minimum value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the symbol confirmation number control timer is 0 (step S804).

When the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is 0 (step S804; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the off data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804; Y). Step S805). If the value of the symbol confirmation count control timer is not 0 (step S804; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the symbol confirmation count signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S806). After that, the process of setting information according to the error status and security status is performed.

In the process of setting information according to the error status and security status, first, a security signal that measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like. If the control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S807). The minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not 0 (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the game machine error status signal is displayed. The on-data of is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is completed. That is, it is output as external information that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized.

Further, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y), that is, when the time is up or has already been up, the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S809; Y), and the front frame. An opening error is occurring (step S810; Y), a lower prize opening fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), an upper prize opening fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), and a general electric signal fraud is occurring (step S813; Y). ), When the magnet fraud is occurring (step S814; Y) or the radio wave fraud is occurring (step S815; Y), the on-data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S818), and the gaming machine error state. The on-data of the signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S819), and the external information editing process is completed. That is, the occurrence of the error is output as external information.

On the other hand, when the value of the security signal control timer is 0 (step S808; Y) and no error has occurred (steps S809 to S815; N), the off-data of the security signal is external information. The data is saved in the output data area (step S816), the off-data of the game machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the external information editing process is completed.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S801) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process is generated every time the number of prize balls (planned payout number, planned game medium payout number) generated by winning a prize in the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). Is a process to output to an external device.

As shown in FIG. 86, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S821). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822). When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (step S822; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 (step S823).

When the number of main prize ball signal outputs is not 0 (step S823; N), the number of times of main prize ball signal output is updated by -1 (step S824), and the main prize ball signal is output to the main prize ball signal output control timer area. The initial value of the control timer is saved (step S825). The initial value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the main prize ball signal. It is the time (for example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S827), and the main prize ball signal editing process is completed. When the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is 0 (step S823; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step). S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

On the other hand, when the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (step S822; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S826). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S826; Y), the process shifts to step S827. When the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S826; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S828), the main prize ball signal editing process is completed.

By the above processing, the information regarding the planned number of game media payouts is transmitted to the outside. After the payout conditions based on the winning of the game ball are satisfied, it is faster to generate and transmit the main prize ball signal than to operate the payout device to complete the payout of the game ball. From the time when the payout condition is satisfied to the time when the payout number of game media is paid out, the information regarding the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is output to the outside. That is, the game control device 100 can output information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, to the outside between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the number of game media to be paid out. It serves as an external output means.

However, if the number of prize balls generated is small and the number is less than the predetermined number (for example, 10) even if this is added to the value of the remaining number of prize balls area, information on the planned number of game media payouts after the actual payout is completed. May be output. By reducing the unit of the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to one main prize ball signal (for example, 1), the payout condition is always satisfied and the number of payouts of game media is paid out. It is also possible to output information regarding the number of planned game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out.

From the above, a payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out game media and a control means (game control) for controlling the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the establishment of a predetermined payout condition. In the game machine including the device 100 and the payout control device 170), the control means is the number of game media to be paid out between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the time when the payout number of game media is paid out. It is provided with an external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information regarding the planned number of game media payouts to the outside. It is also possible to apply this configuration to a slot machine using a game medium as a medal.

Further, the external output means (game control device 100) is based on a storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of scheduled game media payouts that have not been output to the outside, and the establishment of the payout conditions. The addition means (game control device 100) for adding the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to the established payout conditions to the game medium storage area, and the number of scheduled game media payouts stored in the game medium storage area have reached a predetermined number. Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts to the outside and the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts transmitted by the transmission means are subtracted from the game medium storage area. It is provided with a subtraction means (game control device 100).

[Starting port signal editing process]
Next, the details of the start port signal editing process (step S802) in the above-mentioned external information editing process will be described. The start port signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each of the inputs when the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a are input.

As shown in FIG. 87, in the start port signal editing process, first, if the start port signal output control timer is not 0, the start port signal output control timer is updated by -1 (step S831). The minimum value of the start port signal output control timer is set to 0. Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832). When the value of the start port signal output control timer is 0 (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step S833).

When the number of start port signal outputs is not 0 (step S833; N), the number of start port signal outputs is updated by -1 (step S834), and the initial value of the start port signal output control timer is set in the start port signal output control timer area. Is saved (step S835). The initial value of the start port signal output control timer is the sum of the on state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) and the off state (for example, low level) time (for example, 64 ms) of the start port signal (for example, 64 ms). For example, 192 ms). After that, the on-data that turns on the start port signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the start port signal editing process is completed. When the number of start port signal outputs is 0 (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S838). , Ends the start port signal editing process.

On the other hand, when the value of the start port signal output control timer is not 0 (step S832; N), it is determined whether the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S836). The fact that the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section means that the value of the start port signal output control timer is a predetermined time (for example, 64 ms) or more. When the start port signal output control timer is in the output on section (step S836; Y), the process shifts to step S837. When the start port signal output control timer is not in the output on section (step S836; N), the off data for turning off the start port signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S836; N). Step S838), the start port signal editing process is completed.

Next, the control executed by the payout control device 170 will be described. In the payout control device 170, the payout main process shown in FIG. 88 is performed.

[Payout main processing]
The payout main process is started when the power is turned on. In this payout main process, first, interrupt prohibition process (step C1) is performed, and then interrupt vector setting process (step C2) for setting the vector address of the jump destination to be executed when an interrupt occurs, and interrupt process. The interrupt mode setting process (step C3) for setting the mode is performed.

Next, access permission is given to the read-write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM (step C4), and all output ports are set to off (no output) (step C5). After that, a stack pointer setting process (step C6) for setting the stack pointer which is the start address of the area for saving the value of the register or the like when an interrupt occurs is performed, and a process for setting the serial port is performed (step C7).

Then, all the work areas before the access prohibited area are cleared (step C8), all the stack areas after the access prohibited area are cleared (step C9), and the areas related to the input control, the output signal, and the receive buffer are reset. (Step C10). Next, the CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates the timer interrupt signal is activated (step C11). The CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the payout control device 170. The clock generator has a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the crystal oscillator, and a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds) with respect to the CPU in the payout control device 170 based on the divided signal. ) Is provided with a CTC circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal.

After that, the interrupt is enabled (step C12), and the payout-related data reception process (step C13) is performed. As shown in FIG. 90, in the payout-related data reception process, first, the reception of the payout-related data is waited for (step C31). The payout-related data is data that the payout control device 170 transmits to the game control device 100 when a power failure occurs and is backed up by the game control device 100, and is transmitted from the game control device 100 when the power is turned on. ing. This payout-related data includes switch input information, requested payout number based on prize ball number data from the game control device 100, reception buffer information, and game ball number information for which payout has been completed, as information when a power failure occurs. This includes information on the number of prize balls paid out, information on the number of game balls that have not been paid out, and data on the number of unpaid balls. If there is no backed up data in the game control device 100, empty data is transmitted as payout-related data when the power is turned on.

When the payout-related data is received (step C31; Y), the received payout-related data is stored in the corresponding storage area (step C32), and the payout-related data received data is transmitted to the game control device 100 (step C31; Y). Step C33), the payout-related data reception process is completed. After performing this payout-related data reception process, as shown in FIG. 89, a launch control determination process for determining whether or not the game ball can be launched is performed (step C14).

After that, it is determined whether or not the ball lending control mode for ejecting the game ball is in progress based on the ball lending information from the card unit (step C15). In this ball lending mode (step C15; Y), the ball lending control process (step C19) is performed, the payout control process (step C21) is performed, and the error notification editing process (step C22) is performed. By the ball lending control process (step C19) and the payout control process (step C21), a predetermined number of game balls are ejected based on the ball lending information transmitted from the card unit when the player performs the ball lending operation. ..

On the other hand, when not in the ball lending control mode (step C15; N), in the prize ball control mode in which the game balls are ejected based on the prize ball number data transmitted from the game control device 100 due to the occurrence of a prize in the winning opening. It is determined whether or not there is (step C16). In this prize ball control mode (step C16; Y), the prize ball control process (step C20) is performed, the payout control process (step C21) is performed, and the error notification editing process (step C22) is performed. By the prize ball control process (step C20) and the payout control process (step C21), a predetermined number of game balls are ejected based on the prize ball number data transmitted from the game control device 100 when a prize is generated in the winning opening. ..

When not in the prize ball control mode (step C16; N), the payout excess error monitoring process (step C17) for monitoring the occurrence of an error in which the game ball is paid out excessively is performed, and the payout device control start determination process (step). C18) is performed, and the error notification editing process (step C22) is performed. In the payout device control start determination process, as shown in FIG. 91, it is determined whether or not a payout excess error is occurring (step C41), and if a payout excess error is occurring (step C41; Y), a payout device control start determination is made. End the process. Further, when the payout excess error is not in progress (step C41; N), the prize ball control start determination process (step C42) for determining whether to start the prize ball payout control is performed to start the payout control of the lending ball. The ball lending control start determination process (step C43) for determining the above is performed to end the payout device control start determination process.

As shown in FIG. 92, in the prize ball control start determination process, first, among the number of game balls to be paid out based on the prize ball number data, the number of game balls that have not yet been paid out is the number of unpaid game balls on the payout side. It is determined whether it is 0 (step C51). When the number of unpaid payouts on the payout side is 0 (step C51; Y), the prize ball control start determination process ends. If the number of unpaid payouts on the payout side is not 0 (step 51; N), it is determined whether the payout is prohibited (step C52).

If the payout is prohibited (step C52; Y), the prize ball control start determination process ends. Further, when the payout is not prohibited (step C52; N), it is determined whether or not the shoot ball out switch is in the undetermined state (step C53). When the shoot ball out switch is in the undetermined state (step C53; Y), that is, when the ball is out, the prize ball control start determination process is terminated. Further, when the shoot ball out switch is not in the undetermined state (step C53; N), that is, when the ball is not out, it is determined whether the overflow switch is in the undetermined state (step C54).

If the overflow switch is not in the undetermined state (step C54; N), that is, if it is overflowing, the prize ball control start determination process is terminated. If the overflow switch is in an undetermined state (step C54; Y), that is, if the overflow is not in progress, the payout device control mode is set to the prize ball control mode (step C55), and the prize ball control start determination process is performed. finish. As a result, the payout control of the prize ball is started.

In the ball lending control start determination process (step C43) shown in FIG. 91, the prize is replaced with the determination (step C51) of whether the number of unpaid payouts on the payout side in the prize ball control start determination process shown in FIG. 92 is 0. It is determined whether the ball control mode is set, and if the prize ball control mode is not set, the processes of steps C52 to C54 are performed. Then, when the overflow switch is in the undetermined state (step C54; Y), that is, when the overflow is not in progress, the payout device control mode is set to the ball lending control mode, and the ball lending control start determination process is terminated. ..

Returning to FIG. 89, after performing the error notification editing process (step C22), it is determined whether the power failure detection signal 1 is OFF (step C23). The change of the power failure detection signal 1 from ON to OFF is defined as the first power failure detection signal, and the occurrence of the power failure is detected by receiving the first power failure detection signal. If the power failure detection signal 1 is not OFF (step C23; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the process returns to the firing control determination process (step C14). Further, when the power failure detection signal 1 is OFF (step C23; Y), that is, when a power failure occurs and the first power failure detection signal is received, the power outage payout related data transmission process (step C24) is performed.

In the data transmission process related to payout during a power failure (step C24), the input information of the switch at the present time, the number of requested payouts based on the prize ball number data from the game control device 100, the information of the reception buffer, and the number of game balls that have been paid out. A process of transmitting the payout-related data including the information of the prize ball payout number area including the information, the unpaid number data which is the information of the number of game balls for which the payout has not been completed, and the like to the game control device 100 is performed. After that, interrupts are disabled (step C25), all output ports are turned off (step C26), access to the RWM is disabled (step C27), and the power of the gaming machine is waited for to be cut off. The processing of steps C24 to C27 is completed within the first predetermined time, which is the time during which the payout control device 170 can operate from the drop to the first voltage. That is, the payout control device 170 serves as a power failure processing means for transmitting the unpaid number data of the unpaid number storage means to the game control device 100 within the first predetermined time based on the reception of the first power failure detection signal.

[Prize ball control process]
Further, the payout control device 170 performs the process shown in FIG. 93 in the prize ball control process (step C20) in the payout main process shown in FIG. 89. In this prize ball control process, first, the prize ball processing number is loaded (step C61), and branch processing according to the processing number is performed (step C62). When the processing number is 0, the prize ball payout start process (step C63) for starting the payout of the prize balls according to the prize ball number data is performed. If the processing number is 1, the prize ball payout retry determination processing (step C64) is performed. If the processing number is 2, the prize ball payout error release waiting process (step C65) is performed. When the processing number is 3, the prize ball payout termination process (step C66) for completing the payout of the prize balls according to the prize ball number data is performed.

[Prize ball payout start processing]
FIG. 94 shows the above-mentioned prize ball payout start processing (step C63). In this prize ball payout start process, a payout motor control process (step C71) is performed in which the motor of the payout unit is controlled to pay out a predetermined number of game balls according to the prize ball number data, and the prize ball is assigned to the prize ball processing number. The payout retry determination process number 1 is set (step C72), and the prize ball payout start process is completed. By this process, a predetermined number of game balls according to the prize ball number data will be paid out.

[Prize ball payout termination process]
FIG. 95 shows the above-mentioned prize ball payout termination process (step C66). This prize ball payout termination process is performed when the payout of the prize balls corresponding to the prize ball number data is completed. In this prize ball payout termination process, first, the detection payout number monitoring flag is cleared (step C81), and it is determined whether or not there is detection of an excess ball, which is an excessively paid out game ball (step C82). When the excess sphere is detected (step C82; Y), the initial position determination operation is set in the payout motor control state (step C83), and the excess sphere detection flag is cleared (step C85). If the excess sphere is not detected (step C82; N), the basic operation is set in the payout motor control state (step C84), and the excess sphere detection flag is cleared (step C85).

After that, the payout completion signal is transmitted to the game control device 100 (step C86), and the prize ball payout number update process (step C87) for setting the information regarding the number of paid game balls to be transmitted to the external device is performed. Then, 0, which is the number of the prize ball payout start process, is set in the prize ball processing number (step C88), the standby operation mode is set in the payout device control mode (step C89), and the prize ball payout termination process is completed. To do. By this process, the payout completion signal is transmitted to the game control device 100 every time the payout of a predetermined number of game balls according to the prize ball number data is completed. That is, the payout control device 170 serves as a payout completion signal transmitting means for transmitting a payout completion signal indicating that the payout of the number of game balls corresponding to the prize ball number data has been completed to the game control device 100.

[Prize ball payout number update process]
FIG. 96 shows the prize ball payout number update process (step C87) in the above-mentioned prize ball payout termination process. In this prize ball payout number update process, in the prize ball payout number update process, a prize ball signal to be output to an external device is output every time the number of prize balls paid out (game medium payout number) reaches a predetermined number (10 in this case). Set. As described above, the main prize ball signal regarding the planned number of game media payouts is separately transmitted to the external device, and by collating these two signals, the planned number of game media payouts and the game are played in the external device. It is possible to collate with the number of media payouts, and it is possible to detect an abnormal state in which the game medium is paid out without satisfying the payout conditions.

As shown in FIG. 96, in the prize ball payout number update process, first, the payout number is added to the value in the prize ball payout number area (step C91). As the value of the prize ball payout number area before this processing, a fraction that is less than a predetermined number that is a reference for the output of the prize ball signal is stored, and in this processing, the value is paid out to the value of the prize ball payout number area. Adds the value of the number of completed game balls. Then, the added value is saved in the prize ball payout number area (step C92).

That is, since the prize ball payout number area forms a storage area for storing the number of unoutput game media payouts to the outside, the payout control device 170 serves as a storage means. Further, the payout control device 170 serves as an addition means for adding the number of game media payouts corresponding to the number of paid out game balls to the storage area based on the completion of payout of the prize balls.

After that, 10 which is a predetermined number as a reference for the output of the prize ball signal is subtracted from the value in the prize ball payout number region (step C93), and it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step C94). If the subtraction result is not 0 or more (step C94; N), the prize ball payout number update process ends. When the subtraction result is 0 or more (step C94; Y), the value in the prize ball signal output number region is updated by +1 (step C95), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball payout number region (step C96). ), Return to step C93.

That is, the payout control device 170 serves as a transmission means for transmitting the predetermined number of game media payouts to the outside based on the number of game media payouts stored in the storage area reaching a predetermined number. Further, the payout control device 170 serves as a subtraction means for subtracting a predetermined number of game media payouts transmitted by the transmission means from the storage area. Further, the payout control device 170 serves as a payout number external output means capable of outputting information on the number of game media payouts, which is the number of payout game media, to the outside after paying out the payout number of game media. In the present embodiment, one prize ball signal is transmitted corresponding to a predetermined number of game media payouts. Further, in this prize ball payout number update process, the prize ball signal is set, and the transmission is performed by a separate process (not shown).

From the above, after paying out the number of game media to be paid out, the payout number external output means (payout control device 170) capable of outputting information on the number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is provided. Will be there.

The game control device 100 transmits information on the planned number of game media payouts, which is the number of game balls to be paid out, to an external device, and the payout control device 170 externally sends information on the number of game media payouts, which is the number of game balls to be paid out. Although the information is transmitted to the device, either the game control device 100 or the payout control device 170 may transmit the information.

In addition, during the period when the number of prize balls is paid out frequently (during MY) such as during the special game state or the time saving state, the main prize ball signal which is information on the planned number of game media payouts and the prize which is information on the number of game media payouts. Both ball signals may be output, and during other periods, only the prize ball signal, which is information regarding the number of game media payouts, may be output.

Next, the control by the effect control device 200 will be described. As described above, the effect control device 200 includes a main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 and a video control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212 that performs video control under the control of the main control microcomputer 211. In the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211, the 1st main processing shown in FIG. 97 is performed.

[1st main processing]
In the 1st main process, as shown in FIG. 97, the process at the start of the program is first performed. In the process at the start of this program, first, interrupts are prohibited (step D1), and various initialization processes such as CPU initialization, RAM initial value setting, and random number initialization are performed (step D2). Then, timers for various interrupts are activated (step D3) to allow interrupts (step D4).

In this 1st main process, the loop process is then performed as the main loop process. In this loop processing, first, the WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step D5), and the effect button input process (step D6) for creating input information from the input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 is performed. .. Next, the game control command analysis process (step D7) is performed. In this game control command analysis process, it is determined whether or not the command related to the game transmitted from the game control device 100 is correctly received, and if it is correctly received, the command is confirmed, and the scene control process described later is performed. Performs the process of classifying the commands for.

Next, a test mode process (step D8), which is a process related to a test mode for testing the display device 41, the decorative device, the effect device, and the like, is performed. When the test mode is changed by this test mode processing, the processing related to the subsequent games is not performed. However, in the test mode, when the display on the display device 41, the output of the sound from the speaker, the light emission of the LED of the decoration device, the operation of the effect device, etc. are performed, the processes for controlling these (steps D12 to D14 described later). ) To control. The test mode ends when the power of the gaming machine 10 is cut off.

Next, a command to perform the 1st scene control process (step D9) related to the control of the game effect, perform the game machine error monitoring process (step D10) to perform the process related to the error notification, and output to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 212. The effect command editing process (step D11) for editing is performed. Next, a sound control process (step D12) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a, lower speaker 19b), a decoration control process for controlling the LEDs of the panel decoration device 46, and the frame decoration device 18 (step D13). ), The motor / SOL control process (step D14) for controlling the motors and solenoids of the board effect device 44 and the frame effect device 45 is performed. Next, a random number update process (step D15) for updating the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed, and the process returns to the process for clearing the WDT (step D5).

[2nd main processing]
The image control microcomputer (2nd CPU) 212 of the effect control device 200 performs the 2nd main processing shown in FIG. 98. In this 2nd main process, the process at the start of the program is first performed. As the process at the start of this program, first, the CPU initialization process (step D21) for initializing the CPU is performed, the RAM is cleared to 0 (step D22), and the initial value of the RAM is set (step D23). Next, a VDP initialization process (step D24) for initializing the VDP 213 is performed to allow various interrupts (step D25). Next, initialization processing (step D26) of various control processes is performed to allow screen drawing (step D27).

In this 2nd main process, the loop process is then performed as the main loop process. In the processing of this loop, first, the system cycle wait flag is cleared (step D28), and it is determined whether or not the system cycle wait flag is 1 (step D29). The system cycle is a cycle for switching between two buffers for temporarily storing image data, and the system cycle flag is set to "1" when the switch is possible. Until the system cycle wait flag becomes 1, the determination of whether or not the system cycle wait flag is 1 (step D29) is repeated, and when the system cycle wait flag becomes 1 (step D29; Y), the WDT (watchdog) (timer) is cleared (step D30).

Next, the received command check process (step D31) is performed. In this reception command check process, it is determined whether or not the command transmitted from the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 is correctly received, and if it is correctly received, the command is confirmed and the 2nd scene control process is performed. Performs the process of classifying the commands for. Next, based on the received command, the 2nd scene control process (step D32) for determining the display content is performed. In this 2nd scene control process, the notice character and the like are set, the display priority is set, and the effect image corresponding to the progress of the special figure variation display game is displayed on the display device 41.

Next, background processing (step D33) for setting the background is performed. In this background processing, a process of displaying a background according to a game state (whether or not there is a probability state or a customer waiting state), a game mode, an effect mode, a reach scene, or the like is performed. Next, the variation display process (step D34), which is the display control process for the variation of the identification information in the decorative special figure variation display game, is performed, and the display device is linked to the display of the special figure 1 hold display and the special figure 2 hold display. The hold display process (step D35) for setting the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in 41 is performed. In this hold display process, processing related to the display of the pre-effect (look-ahead effect) that changes the display mode of the decorative special figure start memory display is also performed based on the pre-effect information stored in the start storage area.

Next, the customer waiting demo process (step D36) relating to the display of the customer waiting demo is performed. In this customer waiting demo process, processing related to setting a customer waiting screen for displaying characters, images, and the like, processing related to setting a notification display to be displayed on the customer waiting screen, and the like are performed. Next, the display system process (step D37) of transferring the data of the ROM to the buffer set in the RAM and performing the process of actually displaying the data is performed, and the process returns to the process of clearing the system cycle wait flag (step D28).

[1st scene control process]
Next, the details of the 1st scene control process (step D9) in the above-mentioned 1st main process will be described. As shown in FIG. 99, in the 1st scene control process, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 of the effect control device 200 first determines whether or not it is in the test mode (step D51). If it is determined in step D51 that the test mode is in progress (step D51; Y), the 1st scene control process ends. On the other hand, if it is determined in step D51 that the test mode is not in progress (step D51; N), it is determined whether or not the scene change command has been received (step D52). This scene change command is a variety of game-related commands (power-on command, power failure recovery command, customer waiting demo command, variable command, jackpot fanfare command, round command, interval command) transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 200. Etc.).

If it is determined in step D52 that the scene change command has been received (step D52; Y), the game state to be updated (current game state) is acquired (step D53), and the received scene change command has acquired the current state. It is determined whether or not the command is valid for the gaming state of the above, that is, whether or not the command is valid (step D54). If it is determined in step D54 that the command is valid (step D54; Y), the received command is saved (step D55), the effect request flag is set (step D56), and the command identifier of the received command. (Step D57) is performed.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step D52 that the scene change command has not been received (step D52; N), or if it is determined that the command is not valid in step D54 (step D54; N), the command of the received command Branch processing by identifier (step D57) is performed. In this case, branching is performed according to the identifier of the most recently valid command.

In the branch processing by the command identifier (step D57), the processing to be executed based on the received command is selected. When the power-on command is received, the power-on process (step D58) for performing the necessary processing at the time of power-on is performed. Further, when the power failure recovery command is received, the power failure recovery (other than waiting for customers) processing (step D59), which performs the necessary processing at the time of power failure recovery, is performed. Further, when the customer waiting demo command is received, the customer waiting process (step D60) for performing the processing related to the display of the customer waiting demo is performed.

Further, when the variation command is received, the variation process (step D61) for performing the process related to the execution of the decoration special figure variation display game is performed. In this variable processing, information necessary for playing the decorative special figure variable display game is set. In the setting of the information necessary for playing this decorative special figure variation display game, for example, the effect (variation) is produced based on the information (whether or not it is a big hit, the variation pattern information, etc.) included in the variation command transmitted from the game control device 100. Set the pattern, fluctuation time, etc.). When the stop information command is received together with the fluctuation command, the process of setting the corresponding special figure extension display time as the stop display time of the identification information in the decorative special figure fluctuation display game is also performed.

When the fanfare command is received, the jackpot fanfare process (step D62), which is a process related to the start of the special game state, is performed. Further, when the round command is received, the process during the big hit round (step D63), which is the process related to the round game, is performed. When the interval command is received, the jackpot interval process (step D64), which is a process related to the interval between rounds, is performed. When the ending command is received, the jackpot ending process (step D65), which is a process related to the end of the special game state, is performed.

After performing each of the above-mentioned processes selected by the branch process by the command identifier (step D57), the process based on the command that is not immediately reflected in the video is performed. As this process, first, a hold number command reception process (step D66) for performing a process based on the hold number command (special figure 1 hold number command, special figure 2 hold number command) including information on the increase / decrease of the start memory is performed. Performs processing based on the decorative special figure command including information on the stop symbol of the figure variation display game. Performs the decorative special figure command reception process (step D67).

Next, based on the probability information command including the information about the probability state (high probability state, time saving state, or normal state that is neither of these), the corresponding value is internally set and the background command is sent to the video control microcomputer (2ndCPU) 212. The probability information command reception process (step D68) for performing the transmission process is performed. Next, based on a pre-judgment command (pre-reading symbol command, pre-reading variation pattern command) including the result of pre-reading processing that predetermines the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory before executing the special figure variation display game. Perform the pre-determination process (step D69) to perform the process. Then, based on the effect mode command, the effect mode setting process related to the effect setting according to the set effect mode is performed (step C70), and the 1st scene control process is completed. By performing the probability information command reception process (step D68) before the pre-determination process (step D69) and monitoring the change in the probability information in this way, it is possible to perform a highly credible pre-determination.

[Processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the variable processing (step D61) in the above-mentioned 1st scene control processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 100, in the variable processing, the main control microcomputer (1st CPU) 211 of the effect control device 200 first determines whether or not there is an effect request flag (step D81). The effect request flag is a flag that is set when a valid command is received, and if this flag is present, processing is performed based on the received command.

When it is determined in step D81 that there is an effect request flag (step D81; Y), the PB information which is the information related to the input of the effect button 25 is cleared (step D82), and the movable body request set process (step D83). I do. Next, the variation effect pattern setting process (step D84) for setting the details of the variation effect pattern is performed based on the variation command, the stop information command, the effect mode, and the like from the game control device 100.

Then, the accessory movement pattern setting process (step D85) is performed, and a plurality of special figure fluctuations are performed for the advance notice effect of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed and the start memory in which the special figure fluctuation display game is not yet executed. In the display game, the advance notice effect setting process (step D86) for setting the continuous advance notice for continuously executing the effect is performed. After that, the random number seed initialization process (step D87) is performed to set the scene sequence table corresponding to the set fluctuation pattern (step D88). The scene sequence table is a table that manages the execution timing and time of various displays such as the start and stop of the variable display in the decorative special figure variable display game and the display of the effect character. In the scene sequence table, the execution order of a plurality of scenes in which the execution contents and the time are defined is set, and the decorative special figure variation display game is executed by sequentially executing the scenes according to this scene sequence table.

Next, a variation time setting process (step D89) for setting the variation time of the decorative special figure variation display game is performed, and the first scene and the scene update timer are set (step D90). Then, the effect request flag is cleared (step D91), and the changing process is terminated. By these processes, in the effect control device 200, based on the control data (variation display start information) from the game control device 100, the information of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game (execution mode and effect content). ) Is set, and the decorative special figure variation display game will be started. That is, the effect control device 200 starts the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) by receiving the variable display start information. The game control device 100 sets a variation pattern according to the effect mode, but when a common variation pattern is set in each effect mode, the effect content used in the effect control device 200 is set according to the effect mode. To do.

If it is determined in step D81 that there is no effect request flag (step D81; N), it is determined whether or not the value of the scene update timer is 0 (step D92). The scene update timer clocks the execution time of the scene managed according to the scene sequence table, and when the value of the scene update timer is 0, it means that the executed scene has ended.

When it is determined in step D92 that the value of the scene update timer is not 0 (step D92; N), an accessory that sets the operation of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, the board effect device 44, and the frame effect device 45. The operation control process (step D94) is performed. Then, the variation time management process (performing step D95) for managing the variation time of the decorative special figure variation display game, and the process during variation are completed. On the other hand, when it is determined in step D92 that the value of the scene update timer is 0 (step D92; Y), the next normal scene data is set (step D93). As a result, a new scene is started and a predetermined value corresponding to the scene is set in the scene update timer. Then, the accessory movement control process (step D94) is performed, the variation time management process (step D95) is performed, and the process during fluctuation is completed.

Next, the details of the fluctuation time setting processing (step D89) and the fluctuation time management processing (step D95) in the above-mentioned variable processing will be described. Conventionally, a plurality of identification information (special symbols) are displayed on a display device (for example, a liquid crystal display) based on winning a prize in a starting winning opening (starting winning opening 36. Ordinary variable winning device 37, etc.) of a game ball launched into a game area. A variable display game (special figure variable display game or decorative special figure variable display game) that displays variable display (scroll display) on a vessel, etc. was performed, and the result mode (stop symbol) of this variable display game became a specific mode. In relation to the above, a gaming machine (pachinko gaming machine) that imparts a specific gaming value such as generating a privileged game is known. Such a game machine is a game control device that controls the game in an integrated manner, and a display control device (effect control device) that controls a variable display game in the display device based on command information (command command) from the game control device. And.

In such a gaming machine, the display control device starts the variation display game when it receives the variation start command and the symbol command transmitted from the game control device. After that, when the display control device receives the symbol stop command transmitted from the game control device after the lapse of a time predetermined by the fluctuation pattern, the display control device stops the fluctuation display game being performed on the display device, and displays the display result. I try to derive it.

However, in the conventional gaming machine, since the game control device needs to send a symbol stop command to the display control device when the fluctuation time of the variation display game ends, an extra control load is applied to the game control device. Therefore, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the execution of the variable display game in which the game is collectively controlled and the result mode is displayed after the display device 41 changes and displays a plurality of symbols based on the establishment of the predetermined condition is started. A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting commanded variation display start information and a display control means (effect control device 200) for executing a variation display game based on the variation display start information are provided, and the variation display is provided. In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player in relation to the result aspect of the game becoming a special result aspect, the burden of control is reduced.

[Variation time setting process]
As shown in FIG. 101, in the fluctuation time setting process, first, the fluctuation time is acquired based on the fluctuation command forming the fluctuation display start information (step D101), and the value corresponding to the fluctuation time is set in the fluctuation timer (step D102). ). Next, it is determined whether or not the stop information command is received together with the variable command (step D103), and if it is received (step D103; Y), the extended stop time is acquired based on the stop information command (step D104). Then, a value corresponding to the extended stop time is set in the stop time timer (step D105), and the fluctuation time setting process is completed.

On the other hand, when the stop information command is not received (step AD103; N), the value corresponding to the normal stop time is set during the stop time zone (step D106), and the fluctuation time setting process is terminated. That is, when the stop extension information is not received as the variable display start information, the normal stop time, which is a predetermined fixed stop time, is set, and when the stop extension information is received, the stop extension information is responded to. The stop time (special figure extension display time 1 or special figure extension display time 2) is set.

From the above, when the game control means (game control device 100) extends the stop time for displaying the result mode, the game control means (game control device 100) displays the stop extension information according to the extended time as the variable display start information. It is configured to transmit to the display control means (effect control device 200) after the information about the fluctuation time of the game, and the display control means sets a predetermined fixed stop time when the stop extension information is not received. When the stop extension information is received, the stop time is set according to the stop extension information.

[Variable time management process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation time management processing (step D95) in the above-mentioned processing during fluctuation will be described. As shown in FIG. 102, in the fluctuation time management process, first, it is determined whether or not the value of the fluctuation timer is 0 (step D111). If the value of the variable timer is not 0 (step D111; N), the variable timer is updated by -1 (step D114), and the variable time management process is terminated.

On the other hand, when the value of the fluctuation timer is 0 (step D111; Y), it is determined whether the fluctuation display of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game has been stopped (step D112), and when it has not been stopped (step D112; In N), the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game is stopped, the result mode is displayed (step D113), and it is determined whether the value of the stop time timer is 0 (step D115). Further, when the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game has been stopped (step D112; Y), it is determined whether the value of the stop time timer is 0 (step D115).

If the value of the stop time timer is not 0 (step D115; N), the stop time timer is updated by -1 (step D117), and the fluctuation time management process is terminated. When the value of the stop time timer is 0 (step D115; Y), the decorative special figure variation display game ends (step D116), and the variation time management process ends.

By this process, with the end of the variation time of the special figure variation display game controlled by the game control device 100, the effect control device 200 changes the decoration special figure variation display game without depending on the symbol stop command from the game control device 100. The display is stopped and the result mode is displayed. As a result, it is not necessary for the game control device 100 to transmit a symbol stop command for notifying the end of the fluctuation time of the special figure variation display game, and the control load of the game control device 100 can be reduced.

Based on the above, the game is comprehensively controlled, and based on the establishment of a predetermined condition, a variable display that commands the start of execution of a variable display game that displays the result mode after variable display of a plurality of symbols on the display device starts. A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting information and a display control means (effect control device 200) for executing a variable display game based on the variable display start information are provided, and the result mode of the variable display game is In a gaming machine that generates a special gaming state that is advantageous to the player in relation to the special result aspect, the game control means has at least the variation time for specifying the variation time in the variation display game as the variation display start information. Information is transmitted to the display control means, and the display control means starts the fluctuation display game by receiving the fluctuation display start information, and changes based on the fluctuation display over the fluctuation time specified by the fluctuation time information. The display is stopped and the result mode is displayed.

Conventionally, a predetermined number is satisfied by satisfying predetermined payout conditions such as a game ball winning a prize in a winning opening provided in the game area and a specific winning prize being established (for example, a prize being established with a ball or an arrange ball). In a gaming machine that pays out game media such as game balls and medals, a signal is output to an external device (hall computer, etc.) every time the number of paid out game media reaches a predetermined number (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2008-73426 (see Japanese Patent Publication No. 2008-73426).

However, for example, when a large number of game balls are won in the prize device per unit time, such as during a big hit, and a large number of prize balls are paid out, the prize ball signal is sent to the external device after the payout is completed. If it is output, it is difficult for the external device to accurately grasp the number of prize balls (the number of balls to be paid out) paid out during the big hit.

That is, since the payout speed is limited, the prize balls generated during the big hit may be paid out after the big hit ends, and the signal to the external device based on the payout of the prize balls is also transmitted after the big hit ends. Therefore, it is difficult for an external device to determine when the prize ball is generated. In recent years, due to the design of gaming machines, the number of gaming machines with a small lower plate that accepts the paid out game balls and gaming machines that do not have a lower plate is increasing, and the paid out gaming balls frequently overflow. Withdrawals are often suspended. This also causes the payout of the prize balls generated during the big hit to be delayed after the end of the big hit, and the signal to the external device based on the payout of the prize balls is transmitted after the end of the big hit.

On the other hand, the game machine 10 as described above causes the payout device to pay out a predetermined number of game media based on the payout device (payout unit) capable of paying out the game medium and the establishment of the predetermined payout conditions. A gaming machine including a control means (game control device 100, payout control device 170) for controlling, and the control means is between the time when the payout condition is satisfied and the time when the payout number of game media is paid out. The external output means (game control device 100) capable of outputting information regarding the planned number of game media to be paid out, which is the number of game media to be paid out, is provided.

Therefore, since the information can be output to the outside when the predetermined payout conditions are satisfied, even if many payout conditions are met in a short time such as a big hit, the exact number of payout game media can be calculated during the big hit period, such as a hall computer. It becomes possible to transmit to the external device of the above, and it is possible to accurately grasp the number of payout game media when many payout conditions are satisfied in a short time such as a big hit on the external device side. The game medium includes medals as well as game balls.

Further, the external output means (game control device 100) is based on a storage means (game control device 100) having a game medium storage area for storing the number of scheduled game media payouts that have not been output to the outside, and the establishment of the payout conditions. The addition means (game control device 100) for adding the number of scheduled game media payouts corresponding to the established payout conditions to the game medium storage area, and the number of scheduled game media payouts stored in the game medium storage area have reached a predetermined number. Based on this, the transmission means (game control device 100) for transmitting the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts to the outside and the predetermined number of scheduled game media payouts transmitted by the transmission means are subtracted from the game medium storage area. It includes a subtraction means (game control device 100).

Therefore, instead of outputting the data related to the number of game media to the outside as soon as the payout condition is satisfied, the data is once stored in the game medium storage area of the storage means and then output, so that the number of prize balls is easy to handle on the external device side. Information can be output with.

Further, it is provided with a payout number external output means (payout control device 170) capable of outputting information on the number of game media payouts, which is the number of payout game media, to the outside after paying out the payout number of game media.

Therefore, by collating the planned number of game media payouts with the number of game media payouts in the external device, it is possible to detect an abnormal state in which the game media is paid out without satisfying the payout conditions.

[Second Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described.
In the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening are provided below the center case 40 in place of the starting winning opening 36 and the ordinary variable winning device (Public) 37. Predetermined based on the point that the ball distribution device 300 to have is arranged, the point that the normal variation winning device 37 is arranged below the normal starting gate 34, and the number of starting memories has reached a predetermined number. It is different from the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment in that the above-mentioned privilege is given. Therefore, hereinafter, the parts having the same configuration as that of the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals and the description thereof will be omitted, and the different parts will be mainly described.

FIG. 103 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.
In the present embodiment, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is arranged below the normal drawing start gate 34. The normal variable winning device 37 of the present embodiment is a normal variable winning device provided with an attacker-type opening / closing door 37d that can be converted into a state in which the upper end side rotates in a direction in which the upper end side falls toward the front side so that the game ball can easily flow in. However, the ordinary variable winning device 37 is not limited to this, and the ordinary variable winning device 37 is provided with a pair of movable members that can be opened in an inverted "C" shape at the upper part and can be converted into a state in which a game ball can easily flow in. It may be a device.
Further, below the center case 40, an inflow port 301 in which a game ball flowing down the game area 32 can flow in, a first area and a second area, and a game ball flowing into the inflow port 301 are placed in the first area. It has a distribution member 320 that can be alternately converted into a first state that guides toward the second region and a second state that guides toward the second region, and distributes a game ball to the first region and the second region. A ball distribution device 300 is arranged.
Here, in the case of the present embodiment, the first area is the first lottery (the random value for jackpot determination of the first special figure variation display game) by the first lottery means (game control device 100) triggered by the entry of the game ball. Is executed (extraction), and the second area is the second lottery (first lottery) by the second lottery means (game control device 100) triggered by the entry of the game ball. 2 This is the second start opening (second start winning opening) at which the extraction of the random value for determining the jackpot of the special figure fluctuation display game) is executed.
Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, as the starting winning area, the second starting winning opening of the ordinary variable winning device 37, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening of the ball distribution device 300, and the second starting winning opening, It has. That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes one first start winning opening and two second starting winning openings.

In the first embodiment, the second special figure variation display game is configured to be executed with priority over the first special figure variation display game, but in the second embodiment, the second special figure variation display game is executed. , The first special figure variation display game can be configured to be executed with priority, or can be configured not to be executed with priority. Here, the case where the second special figure variation display game is not preferentially executed may be the case where the first special figure variation display game is preferentially executed, and the most stored start memory. Special figure variation display game corresponding to the old start memory (first special figure variation display game when the oldest start memory is the first start memory, second when the oldest start memory is the second start memory It may be possible to give priority to the special figure variation display game).
Further, either one of the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening of the ball distribution device 300 may be a normal variable winning device in which the winning area can be changed.

FIG. 104 is a front view of the ball sorting device 300, and FIG. 105 is an exploded perspective view of the ball sorting device 300.
The ball distribution device 300 includes a mounting base member 310, a distribution member 320 and a ball guiding member 330 mounted on the front side of the mounting base member 310, and a mounting base member from the front of the distribution member 320 and the ball guiding member 330. A cover member 340 mounted on the front side of the 310, a start port 1 switch (first special figure start sensor) 36a, and a start port 2 switch (second special figure start sensor) arranged on the rear side of the mounting base member 310. ) 37a and the decorative substrate 350, and a back box member 360 mounted on the rear surface side of the mounting base member 310 with the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the decorative substrate 350 supported from the rear. It is composed.
That is, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has one starting port 1 switch 36a (a switch for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the first starting winning opening of the ball distribution device 300) and two starting ports 2 switches 37a (a switch). It is provided with a switch for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the ordinary variable winning device 37, and a switch for detecting a game ball that has won a prize in the second start winning opening of the ball distribution device 300).

The decorative substrate 350 is a substrate including a plurality of light emitting elements (for example, LEDs), and is configured to emit light for decoration and production.
The mounting base member 310 and the cover member 340 are made of a material capable of transmitting light so that the light emitted from the decorative substrate 350 can be visually recognized from the front of the ball sorting device 300. On the other hand, the distribution member 320 is made of a material that cannot transmit light in order to block the light from the decorative substrate 350. The ball guiding member 330 may be made of a material that can transmit light, or may be made of a material that cannot transmit light.

FIG. 111 is a front view of the mounting base member 310, and FIG. 107 is a view of the mounting base member 310 in a state where the distribution member 320, the ball guiding member 330, the starting port 1 switch 36a and the starting port 2 switch 37a are mounted. It is a front view.
The mounting base member 310 is a member for mounting the ball distribution device 300 on the game board 30, and has a plate shape formed in a predetermined shape.
Of the mounting base member 310, a distribution member mounting recess 311 recessed toward the rear side is provided at a substantially central portion in the left-right direction and above the center in the vertical direction. The distribution member mounting recess 311 is a recess for mounting the distribution member 320, and is an arc-shaped arc portion 311a that is convex upward when viewed from the front-rear direction, and a linear left contact portion 312L and right cover. It is formed in a shape formed by combining the contact portion 312R and the contact portion 312R.
One end of the left contacted portion 312L is connected to the left end of the arc portion 311a and is inclined downward toward the one end side (that is, the left side).
One end of the right contacted portion 312R is connected to the right end of the arc portion 311a, and the other end is connected to the other end of the left contacted portion 312L, and the right end is inclined downward toward the one end side (that is, the right side). ing.

A distribution member rotation shaft communication hole 313 that opens forward is provided at a position corresponding to the center of the circle including the arc portion 311a on the circumference of the bottom portion of the distribution member mounting recess 311. The distribution member rotation shaft communication hole 313 is a hole for communicating with the rotation shaft 322 (see FIG. 109) of the distribution member 320 attached to the distribution member mounting recess 311. By attaching the distribution member 320 to the mounting base member 310 so that the distribution member rotation shaft communication hole 313 and the rotation shaft 322 communicate with each other, the distribution member 320 is rotatably fixed to the mounting base member 310. It becomes possible.

On the front surface of the mounting base member 310, a through hole 314A penetrating in the front-rear direction is provided at a connecting portion between the left contacted portion 312L and the right contacted portion 312R. The through hole 314A is a hole for passing light from the decorative substrate 350 arranged on the rear surface side of the mounting base member 310 from the rear surface side to the front surface side of the mounting base member 310, and is a hole for rotating the distribution member. It is provided below the shaft communication hole 313 so as to be vertically aligned with the distribution member rotation shaft communication hole 313.
Further, on the front surface of the mounting base member 310, a plurality of (two in the case of this embodiment) ball guiding member mounting convex portions 314B are provided below the distribution member mounting recess 311. The ball guiding member mounting convex portion 314B is a convex portion for supporting the ball guiding member 330 from below. A plurality of (two in the case of the present embodiment) protrusions 332 are provided on the front surface of the ball guide member 330, and the protrusions 332 are provided with holes 348 (FIG. 106, etc.) provided in the cover member 340. It is designed to be inserted into (see). That is, the ball guide member 330 is sandwiched between the mounting base member 310 and the cover member 340.

At the bottom of the distribution member mounting recess 311, a left opening 315L and a right opening 315R penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided side by side in the left-right direction. The openings 315L and 315R are holes for passing light from the decorative substrate 350 arranged on the rear surface side of the mounting base member 310 from the rear surface side to the front surface side of the mounting base member 310.
The distribution member 320 attached to the distribution member mounting recess 311 is formed in a substantially semicircular shape when viewed from the front-rear direction, and is made of a material that cannot transmit light as described above. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIG. 107, when the distribution member 320 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 322 and comes into contact with the right contact portion 312R (second state), the left The light that has passed through the opening 315L can be visually recognized from the front, but the light that has passed through the right opening 315R is blocked by the distribution member 320 and cannot be visually recognized from the front. On the other hand, when the distribution member 320 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 322 and comes into contact with the left contacted portion 312L (first state), the light passing through the right opening portion 315R Can be seen from the front, but the light that has passed through the left opening 315L is blocked by the distribution member 320 and cannot be seen from the front. As a result, the state of the distribution member 320 can be visually recognized from the front of the ball distribution device 300.
When the mounting base member 310 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, the openings 315L and 315R may not be provided. By providing the openings 315L and 315R in the mounting base member 310 made of a material capable of transmitting light as in the present embodiment, the light emission of the decorative substrate 350 can be visually recognized more clearly. Of course, when the mounting base member 310 is made of a material that cannot transmit light, it is necessary to provide openings 315L and 315R in order to make the state of the distribution member 320 visible from the front of the ball distribution device 300. is there.

Of the mounting base member 310, a left ball flow hole 316L and a right ball flow hole 316R penetrating in the front-rear direction are provided side by side in the left-right direction below the center in the vertical direction. The ball flow down holes 316L and 316R are holes for passing the game ball from the front surface side to the rear surface side of the mounting base member 310, and are formed in a size that allows the game ball to pass through.
Here, the start port 1 switch 36a and the start port 2 switch 37a have a ball passage hole, and are configured to detect a game ball that has passed through the ball passage hole. In the present embodiment, the starting port 1 switch 36a is arranged so that the ball passage hole of the starting port 1 switch 36a corresponds to the left ball flow-down hole 316L on the rear surface side of the mounting base member 310 (that is, the starting port 1). The ball passage hole of the switch 36a is arranged so as to be aligned with the left ball flow-down hole 316L in the front-rear direction), and the start port 2 switch 37a provided in the ball distribution device 300 is on the rear surface side of the mounting base member 310. Among them, the ball passage hole of the start port 2 switch 37a corresponds to the right ball flow-down hole 316R (that is, the ball passage hole of the start port 2 switch 37a is aligned with the right ball flow-down hole 316R in the front-rear direction). It is arranged.

That is, in the present embodiment, the left ball flow-down hole 316L is the first start winning opening of the ball distribution device 300, and the right ball flow-down hole 316R is the second start winning opening of the ball distribution device 300.
The left ball flow-down hole 316L may be used as the second start winning opening of the ball distribution device 300, and the right ball flow-down hole 316R may be used as the first start winning opening of the ball distribution device 300. That is, the start port 1 switch 36a is arranged so that the ball passage hole of the start port 1 switch 36a corresponds to the right ball flow down hole 316R on the rear surface side of the mounting base member 310, and the start port 2 switch 37a is arranged. On the rear surface side of the mounting base member 310, the ball passage hole of the start port 2 switch 37a may be arranged so as to correspond to the left ball flow down hole 316L.

Of the front surface of the mounting base member 310, a left ball guide rib 317L and a right ball guide rib 317R projecting toward the front side are provided side by side in the left-right direction at a substantially central portion in the vertical direction. The left ball guidance rib 317L is a rib for guiding the game ball distributed to the left side by the distribution member 320 to the left ball flow down hole 316L, and the right ball guidance rib 317R is distributed to the right side by the distribution member 320. It is a rib for guiding the game ball to the right ball flow down hole 316R.

A plurality of (four in the case of this embodiment) cover member mounting portions 318 are provided on the front surface of the mounting base member 310. The cover member mounting portion 318 is composed of a mounting hole 318a for fixing the cover member 340 and a positioning rib 318b for positioning the cover member 340, and the cover member mounting portion 345 of the cover member 340 (see FIG. 106). ) Is configured to be engageable.
Further, the mounting base member 310 is provided with a plurality of (four in the case of the present embodiment) screw holes 319, and the mounting base member 310 (ball distribution device 300) can be fixed to the game board 30 by screws. It has become like.

FIG. 106 is a rear view of the cover member 340.
The cover member 340 is provided on the plate-shaped cover member main body 341 formed in a predetermined shape, the left side wall 342L and the right side wall 342R erected on the rear surface of the cover member main body 341, and the rear surface of the cover member main body 341. It is a concave member composed of the left flow down gutter 343L and the right flow down gutter 343R.
The left side wall 342L is provided on the rear surface of the cover member main body 341 at a position on the left side of the center in the left-right direction and extending from the upper end of the cover member main body 341 to substantially the center in the vertical direction.
The right side wall 342R is provided on the rear surface of the cover member main body 341 at a position on the right side of the center in the left-right direction and extending from the upper end of the cover member main body 341 to substantially the center in the vertical direction.
Here, in a state where the cover member 340 is attached to the mounting base member 310, the upper end portion of the left side wall 342L, the upper end portion of the right side wall 342R, the upper end portion of the cover member main body 341, and the upper end portion of the mounting base member 310. The opening surrounded by and, which opens upward, becomes the inflow port 301. Therefore, the distance between the upper end of the left side wall 342L and the upper end of the right side wall 342R is larger than the diameter of the game ball.

The left flow down gutter 343L is a position (specifically, left) of the rear surface of the cover member main body 341 corresponding to the left ball flow down hole 316L of the mounting base member 310 in a state where the cover member 340 is attached to the mounting base member 310. It is provided at a position where it is aligned with the lower edge of the ball flow lower hole 316L in the front-rear direction).
The right flow down gutter 343R is located on the rear surface of the cover member main body 341 at a position corresponding to the right ball flow down hole 316R of the mounting base member 310 in a state where the cover member 340 is attached to the mounting base member 310 (specifically, the right side). It is provided at a position where it is aligned with the lower edge of the ball flow bottom hole 316R in the front-rear direction).
Here, the left gutter 343L is provided below the left wall 342L, but the distance T1 between the left gutter 343L and the left wall 342L is larger than the diameter of the game ball.
Further, the right flow down gutter 343R is provided below the right side wall 342R, but the distance T2 between the right flow down gutter 343R and the right side wall 342R is larger than the diameter of the game ball.
Further, the left flow down gutter 343L and the right flow down gutter 343R are provided side by side in the left-right direction, but the distance T3 between the left flow down gutter 343L and the right flow down gutter 343R is larger than the diameter of the game ball.
Therefore, the gap between the left gutter 343L and the left wall 342L (that is, the gap T1), the gap between the right gutter 343R and the right wall 342R (that is, the gap T2), the left gutter The game ball can flow down from the inside of the ball distribution device 300 to the outside through the gap between the 343L and the right flow down gutter 343R (that is, the gap of the interval T3).

The rear surface of the cover member 340 is provided with a flow path configuration convex portion 344 that projects toward the rear side. The flow path configuration convex portion 344 guides the game ball flowing into the inflow port 301 to the distribution member 320, and guides the game ball distributed to the left side by the distribution member 320 to the left flow down gutter 343L and shakes it. It is a convex portion for forming a flow path for guiding the game ball distributed to the right side by the branch member 320 to the right flow down gutter 343R.
Therefore, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 301 flows down from the inflow port 301 to the distribution member 320 along the flow path constitution convex portion 344 in a state of being sandwiched between the flow path constitution convex portion 344 and the mounting base member 310. Then, it flows down from the distribution member 320 to the left flow down gutter 343L or the right flow down gutter 343R.

On the rear surface of the cover member 340, when the cover member 340 is attached to the attachment base member 310, the cover member attachment that protrudes toward the rear side at a position corresponding to the cover member attached portion 318 of the attachment base member 310. A portion 345 is provided.
The side surface of the cover member mounting portion 345 is formed in a columnar shape that matches the inner side surface of the positioning rib 318b of the cover member mounting portion 318, and the rear end surface can be fitted into the mounting hole 318a of the cover member mounting portion 318. It has a protrusion. The mounting base member 310 and the cover member 340 are brought close to each other in a state where the side surface of the cover member mounting portion 345 and the inner surface surface of the positioning rib 318b of the cover member mounted portion 318 corresponding to the cover member mounting portion 345 are in contact with each other. The protrusion of the cover member mounting portion 345 is fitted into the mounting hole 318a of the cover member mounting portion 318 so that the cover member 340 can be fixed at the correct position of the mounting base member 310.

Among the cover members 340, the positions corresponding to the left opening 315L of the mounting base member 310 (that is, the positions aligned in the front-rear direction with the left opening 315L) when the cover member 340 is attached to the mounting base member 310 are set. A left state confirmation opening 346L that penetrates in the front-rear direction is provided. The left state confirmation opening 346L is a hole for passing light that has passed through the left opening 315L from the rear surface side to the front surface side of the cover member 340.
Further, among the cover members 340, at a position corresponding to the right opening 315R of the mounting base member 310 (that is, a position aligned in the front-rear direction with the right opening 315R) when the cover member 340 is attached to the mounting base member 310. Is provided with a right state confirmation opening 346R that penetrates in the front-rear direction. The right state confirmation opening 346R is a hole for passing light that has passed through the right opening 315R from the rear surface side to the front surface side of the cover member 340.

As described above, when the distribution member 320 rotates clockwise and comes into contact with the right contact portion 312R (second state) (see FIG. 107), the light passing through the right opening 315R Is blocked by the sorting member 320. Therefore, when the distribution member 320 is in the second state, the light that has passed through the left opening 315L can be visually recognized through the left state confirmation opening 346L, but the light that has passed through the right opening 315R cannot be visually recognized. That is, in the present embodiment, the player can recognize that the distribution member 320 is in the second state when the left state confirmation opening 346L is shining but the right state confirmation opening 346R is not shining. ..
On the other hand, when the distribution member 320 rotates in the counterclockwise direction and comes into contact with the left contacted portion 312L (first state), the light passing through the left opening 315L is blocked by the distribution member 320. Be done. Therefore, when the distribution member 320 is in the first state, the light that has passed through the right opening 315R can be visually recognized through the right state confirmation opening 346R, but the light that has passed through the left opening 315L cannot be visually recognized. That is, in the present embodiment, the player can recognize that the distribution member 320 is in the first state when the right state confirmation opening 346R is shining but the left state confirmation opening 346L is not shining. ..
That is, the decorative substrate 350, the left state confirmation opening 346L, and the right state confirmation opening 346R form the distribution state display means for displaying the state of the distribution member 320.

When the cover member 340 is made of a material capable of transmitting light, the state confirmation openings 346L and 346R may not be provided. By providing the state confirmation openings 346L and 346R in the cover member 340 made of a material capable of transmitting light as in the present embodiment, the light emission of the decorative substrate 350 can be visually recognized more clearly.
When the cover member 340 is not provided with the state confirmation openings 346L and 346R, the player can see that the distribution member 320 is in the second state when the upper left side of the cover member 340 is shining but the upper right side is not shining (FIG. It can be recognized that the distribution member 320 is in the first state when the upper right side of the cover member 340 is shining but the upper left side is not shining.

A decorative sticker (not shown) is attached to the front surface of the cover member main body 341. The decorative sticker is made of a material capable of transmitting light so that the light emitted from the decorative substrate 350 can be visually recognized from the front of the ball sorting device 300 (cover member 340). Therefore, a hole may or may not be provided at a position corresponding to the state confirmation openings 346L and 346R in the decorative sticker, but by providing the hole, the decorative substrate 350 emits light. It will be more clearly visible.
That is, when both the cover member 340 and the decorative sticker are made of a material capable of transmitting light as in the present embodiment, the cover member 340 is provided with state confirmation openings 346L and 346R, and the decorative sticker is provided with a hole. The cover member 340 may be provided with state confirmation openings 346L and 346R so that the decorative seal is not provided with a hole, and the cover member 340 may be configured so as not to have a hole. It is also possible to provide a hole in the decorative seal without providing the state confirmation openings 346L and 346R, or to provide a hole in the decorative seal without providing the state confirmation openings 346L and 346R in the cover member 340. It is also possible to configure so that no part is provided. Of course, when the cover member 340 is made of a material that cannot transmit light, it is necessary to provide the state confirmation openings 346L and 346R in order to make the state of the distribution member 320 visible from the front of the ball distribution device 300. is there. Further, when the decorative sticker is made of a material that cannot transmit light, it is necessary to provide a hole in order to make the state of the sorting member 320 visible from the front of the ball sorting device 300.

FIG. 108 is a front perspective view of the distribution member 320, and FIG. 109 is a rear perspective view of the distribution member 320. Further, FIG. 110 is a front view of the distribution member 320 and the ball guide member 330 mounted on the mounting base member 310.
The distribution member 320 is erected on the front surface of the semicircular plate portion 321 formed in a substantially semicircular shape, the rotating shaft 322 that penetrates perpendicularly to the semicircular plate portion 321 and the semicircular plate portion 321. It is composed of a left ball holding portion 323L and a right ball holding portion 323R, and a left and right partition wall 324 erected on the front surface of the semicircular plate portion 321.

The semicircular plate portion 321 can be divided into a semicircular region and a pentagonal region whose side is in contact with the strings in the semicircular region.
The rotating shaft 322 is provided at a position corresponding to the center of a circle including the arc of the semicircular region of the semicircular plate portion 321 on the circumference.
The left sphere holding portion 323L and the right sphere holding portion 323R are provided in the pentagonal region of the semicircular plate portion 321.
The left and right partition walls 324 are provided perpendicular to the strings in the semicircular region of the semicircular plate portion 321 and extending from the rotation shaft 322 to the arc of the semicircular region of the semicircular plate portion 321.
In the state where the distribution member 320 is mounted on the mounting base member 310, the semicircle plate portion 321 is housed in the distribution member mounting recess 311 but holds the left sphere provided on the front surface of the semicircle plate portion 321. The portion 323L, the right ball holding portion 323R, and the left and right partition walls 324 project forward from the front surface of the mounting base member 310. As a result, the game ball that has flowed into the inflow port 301 can be received by the left ball holding portion 323L or the right ball holding portion 323R.

As shown in FIG. 109, the left end portion of the pentagonal region of the semicircular plate portion 321 is a left contact portion 325L that abuts on the left contact portion 312L of the mounting base member 310, and the semicircular plate portion 321 has a left end portion. The right end portion of the pentagonal region is a right contact portion 325R that abuts on the right contact portion 312R of the mounting base member 310.
That is, the distribution member 320 is mounted on the mounting base member 310 (that is, the rotation shaft 322 communicates with the distribution member rotation shaft communication hole 313 of the mounting base member 310). It is configured so that the 325L can rotate clockwise until it abuts on the left contacted portion 312L, and the right abutting portion 325R can rotate counterclockwise until it abuts on the right contacted portion 312R.

When the distribution member 320 is in the second state (that is, the right contact portion 325R is in contact with the right contact portion 312R, see FIG. 110), when the game ball flows into the inflow port 301, the game ball Flows down toward the left ball holding portion 323L of the distribution member 320 and collides with the upper surface of the left ball holding portion 323L (left ball holding portion inclined surface 326L). When the game ball collides with the inclined surface 326L of the left ball holding portion, the distribution member 320 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 322 due to the weight of the game ball, and the second state to the first state. Convert to. When the distribution member 320 is in the first state (that is, the state where the left contact portion 325L is in contact with the left contact portion 312L), the left ball holding portion inclined surface 326L and the upper surface of the left end portion of the ball guidance member 330 (left). The ball guiding member inclined surface 331L) is in a substantially continuous state, and the game ball rolls on the left ball holding portion inclined surface 326L and the left ball guiding member inclined surface 331L, and then becomes the left ball guiding rib 317L. It is guided and flows down toward the left ball flow-down hole 316L (first start winning opening). Then, the game ball is detected by the start port 1 switch 36a after passing through the left ball flow-down hole 316L. That is, the game ball is detected as a start winning ball of the first special figure variation display game. At this time, as the game ball flows into the inflow port 301 and the distribution member 320 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the left state confirmation opening 346L of the cover member 340 is lit to confirm the right state. The opening 346R is converted into a shining state.

On the other hand, when the distribution member 320 is in the first state (that is, the state where the left contact portion 325L is in contact with the left contact portion 312L) and the game ball flows into the inflow port 301, the game ball is released. It flows down toward the right ball holding portion 323R of the distribution member 320 and collides with the upper surface of the right ball holding portion 323R (right ball holding portion inclined surface 326R). When the game ball collides with the inclined surface 326R of the right ball holding portion, the distribution member 320 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 322 due to the weight of the game ball from the first state to the second state. Convert to. When the distribution member 320 is in the second state (that is, the state where the right contact portion 325R is in contact with the right contact portion 312R, see FIG. 110), the right end of the right ball holding portion inclined surface 326R and the ball guidance member 330. The upper surface of the portion (right ball guiding member inclined surface 331R) is in a substantially continuous state, and the game ball rolls on the right ball holding portion inclined surface 326R and the right ball guiding member inclined surface 331R, and then the right ball. It is guided by the induction rib 317R and flows down toward the right ball flow-down hole 316R (second start winning opening). Then, the game ball is detected by the start port 2 switch 37a after passing through the right ball flow-down hole 316R. That is, the game ball is detected as a start winning ball of the second special figure variation display game. At this time, as the game ball flows into the inflow port 301 and the distribution member 320 rotates in the clockwise direction, the right state confirmation opening 346R of the cover member 340 is shining to the left state confirmation opening. It is converted into a state in which 346L is shining.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 110, the ball distribution device 300 is a horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10 in a state where the right ball holding portion inclined surface 326R and the right ball guiding member inclined surface 331R are substantially continuous. The inclination angle of the right ball holding portion inclined surface 326R and the inclination angle of the right ball guiding member inclined surface 331R with respect to the horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10 are configured to be different from each other. Specifically, the inclination angle of the right ball guiding member inclined surface 331R is smaller than the inclination angle of the right ball holding portion inclined surface 326R. As a result, the flow force of the game ball can be reduced and the game ball can flow down toward the right ball flow-down hole 316R, so that the game ball distributed to the right side by the distribution member 320 flows down to an unintended area. It is possible to prevent it from being lost.
Similarly, in the ball distribution device 300, in a state where the left ball holding portion inclined surface 326L and the left ball guiding member inclined surface 331L are substantially continuous, the inclination angle of the left ball holding portion inclined surface 326L with respect to the horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10 , The inclination angle of the left ball guiding member inclined surface 331L with respect to the horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10 is configured to be different. Specifically, the inclination angle of the left ball guide member inclined surface 331L is smaller than the inclination angle of the left ball holding portion inclined surface 326L. As a result, the flow force of the game ball can be reduced and the game ball can flow down toward the left ball flow-down hole 316L, so that the game ball distributed to the left side by the distribution member 320 flows down to an unintended area. It can be prevented from being lost.

As shown in FIG. 112, the cover member 340 may be provided with a left elongated hole 347L and a right elongated hole 347R penetrating in the front-rear direction. The elongated holes 347L and 347R can be used to confirm the occurrence of ball clogging in the ball sorting device 300, or to eliminate the ball clogging in the ball sorting device 300 by inserting a wire or the like from the elongated holes 347L and 347R. It is a hole to do. The left elongated hole 347L is provided along the flow path of the game ball distributed to the left side (that is, to the left ball flow-down hole 316L) by the distribution member 320, and the right elongated hole 347R is provided by the distribution member 320. It is provided along the flow path of the game ball to be distributed to the right side (that is, to the right ball flow down hole 316R).
When the cover member 340 is provided with the elongated holes 347L and 347R, the elongated holes are also provided at the positions corresponding to the elongated holes 347L and 347R among the decorative stickers attached to the front surface of the cover member main body 341.
Although the state confirmation openings 346L and 346R are not shown in FIG. 112, when the cover member 340 is provided with the elongated holes 347L and 347R, the cover member 340 may or may not be provided with the state confirmation openings 346L and 346R. You may.

The ball distribution device 300 is a device that alternately distributes the game ball to the first start winning opening (left ball flow down hole 316L) and the second start winning opening (right ball flow down hole 316R) by the distribution member 320. In order to improve the certainty of alternating distribution, the distribution member 320 whose state has been changed by the inflow of the game ball is provided with a return suppressing mechanism 370 which can suppress the change to the original state by recoil.

Hereinafter, specific examples of the return suppression mechanism 370 will be shown in FIGS. 113 to 115, but the configuration of the return suppression mechanism 370 is not limited to the specific example and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
For convenience, the shapes of the members / parts of the ball distribution device 300 shown in FIGS. 113 to 115 may differ from the shapes of the members / parts of the ball distribution device 300 shown in FIGS. 103 to 112. Unless otherwise specified, the members / parts having the same reference numerals as the members / parts of the ball distribution device 300 shown in FIGS. 103 to 112 are referred to as the ball distribution device 300 shown in FIGS. 103 to 112. It has the same function as the members and parts of.

Returning to FIG. 113, a first example of the suppression mechanism 370 is shown.
In the return suppressing mechanism 370 of the first example, as shown in FIG. 113 (b), the distribution member 320 is in the first state among the rotating magnet 371 provided on the distribution member 320 and the mounting base member 310. It is configured to include a fixed magnet 372 having the same pole as the rotating magnet 371, which is provided at a position facing the rotating magnet 371 in the neutral posture with respect to the second state. For example, when the rotating magnet 371 has an N pole, the fixed magnet 372 also has an N pole.
Here, the "neutral posture between the first state and the second state" means that, as shown in FIG. 113 (a), the left and right partition walls 324 of the distribution member 320 are relative to the horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10. It is a posture that is almost vertical.

In this case, even if the distribution member 320 tries to return to the original state with the momentum (reaction) of the state change (that is, the distribution member 320 bounces with the momentum of the change from the first state to the second state and the first state. Even if it tries to return to the state, or even if the distribution member 320 tries to bounce with the momentum converted from the second state to the first state and return to the second state), the rotating magnet 371 and the fixed magnet 372 Since it is possible to repel each other and suppress the momentum, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 320 from returning to the original state due to the momentum of the state change, and the game balls are alternately placed in the first region and the second region ( In the case of the present embodiment, it is possible to improve the certainty of sorting (alternately between the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening).
Further, since the distribution member 320 does not stay in the neutral posture (see FIG. 113 (a)) due to the repulsion between the rotating magnet 371 and the fixed magnet 372, the distribution member 320 is surely in the first state (FIG. 113). (See (c)) or the state can be converted to the second state.

In the example shown in FIG. 113, the rotating magnet 371 is placed at a position corresponding to the upper end portion of the left and right partition wall 324 (that is, the upper end portion of the left and right partition wall 324) in the semicircular plate portion 321 of the distribution member 320. Although they are arranged at positions arranged in the front-rear direction), the arrangement position of the rotating magnet 371 can be arbitrarily changed.
Further, in the example shown in FIG. 113, the fixed magnet 372 is arranged at the bottom of the distribution member mounting recess 311 of the mounting base member 310, but the fixed magnet 372 corresponds to the arrangement position of the rotating magnet 371. It can be changed arbitrarily as appropriate.

Returning to FIG. 114, a second example of the suppression mechanism 370 is shown.
As shown in FIGS. 114 (a) and 114 (b), the return suppressing mechanism 370 of the second example is the distribution member of the first rotating magnet 371A provided on the distribution member 320 and the mounting base member 310. When 320 is in the first state (see FIG. 114 (b)), a first fixed magnet 372A having a pole different from that of the first rotating magnet 371A, which is provided at a position facing the first rotating magnet 371A, and a vibration. The second rotating magnet 371B provided on the dividing member 320 and the distribution member 320 of the mounting base member 310 face the second rotating magnet 371B in the second state (see FIG. 114A). It is configured to include a second fixed magnet 372B having a pole different from the second rotating magnet 371B provided at the position.
Here, the first rotating magnet 371A and the second rotating magnet 371B provided on the distribution member 320 may have the same poles, but are preferably different poles, for example, the first rotating magnet 371A. Is the N pole, the second rotating magnet 371B is the S pole, the first fixed magnet 372A is the S pole, and the second fixed magnet 372B is the N pole.

In this case, even if the distribution member 320 tries to return to the original state by the momentum (reaction) of the state change, the first rotating magnet 371A and the first fixed magnet 372A are attracted to each other, or the second rotating magnet 371B And the second fixed magnet 372B are attracted to each other, and the momentum can be suppressed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 320 from returning to the original state due to the momentum of the state change, and the game ball can be moved to the first region and the first region. It is possible to improve the certainty of alternately allocating the two regions (in the case of the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening alternately).
Further, by attracting the first rotating magnet 371A and the first fixed magnet 372A, the distribution member 320 can be surely changed to the first state, and the second rotating magnet 371B and the second fixed magnet can be reliably changed to the first state. By inquiring with 372B, the distribution member 320 can be surely changed to the second state.

Returning to FIG. 115, a third example of the suppression mechanism 370 is shown. FIG. 115 is an enlarged view of the vicinity of the rotation shaft 322 of the distribution member 320.
In the return suppressing mechanism 370 of the third example, as shown in FIGS. 115A and 115B, the contact portion 373 provided on the distribution member 320 and the contact portion 373 project from the distribution member 320. As described above, the spring 374 for urging the abutting portion 373 and the distribution member fixing plate 375 with which the tip of the abutting portion 373 abuts are provided.
The spring 374 is housed in the spring storage portion 320a provided in the distribution member 320.
The distribution member fixing plate 375 has a shape that acts to retreat the contact portion 373 toward the distribution member 320 against the urging force of the spring 374 while the distribution member 320 is changing its state. The distribution member fixing plate is fixed to the mounting base member 310 in a state of being rotatable around the rotation shaft 375a of the distribution member fixing plate.

As shown in FIG. 115 (a), the contact portion 373 is in a state of protruding from the distribution member 320 by the urging force of the spring 374 when the distribution member 320 is in the first state.
Then, when the game ball flows into the inflow port 301 when the distribution member 320 is in the first state, the game ball flows down toward the right ball holding portion 323R of the distribution member 320 and the right ball holding portion. It collides with the upper surface of 323R (right ball holding portion inclined surface 326R). When the game ball collides with the inclined surface 326R of the right ball holding portion, the distribution member 320 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 322 due to the weight of the game ball from the first state to the second state. Convert to. At that time, the contact portion 373 moves from the right side to the left side through the central portion on the upper surface of the distribution member fixing plate 375. As the contact portion 373 moves from the right side to the center portion, that is, as the distribution member 320 changes from the first state to the neutral posture, a force that opposes the urging force of the spring 374 is gradually applied to the contact portion 373. Gradually retracts into the spring housing 320a. After that, as the contact portion 373 moves from the central portion to the left side, that is, as the distribution member 320 changes from the neutral posture to the second state, the force against the urging force of the spring 374 is gradually released and the contact portion 373 abuts. The part 373 gradually protrudes.

Further, as shown in FIG. 115 (b), the contact portion 373 is in a state of protruding from the distribution member 320 by the urging force of the spring 374 when the distribution member 320 is in the second state.
Then, when the game ball flows into the inflow port 301 when the distribution member 320 is in the second state, the game ball flows down toward the left ball holding portion 323L of the distribution member 320 and the left ball holding portion. It collides with the upper surface of 323L (left ball holding portion inclined surface 326L). When the game ball collides with the inclined surface 326L of the left ball holding portion, the distribution member 320 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 322 due to the weight of the game ball, and the second state to the first state. Convert to. At that time, the contact portion 373 moves from the left side to the right side through the central portion on the upper surface of the distribution member fixing plate 375. As the contact portion 373 moves from the left side to the center portion, that is, as the distribution member 320 changes from the second state to the neutral posture, a force that opposes the urging force of the spring 374 is gradually applied to the contact portion 373. Gradually retracts into the spring housing 320a. After that, as the contact portion 373 moves from the central portion to the right side, that is, as the distribution member 320 changes from the neutral posture to the first state, the force against the urging force of the spring 374 is gradually released and the contact portion 373 abuts. The part 373 gradually protrudes.

That is, while the distribution member 320 is rotating due to the weight of the game ball (the distribution member 320 changes its state), the contact portion 373 is retracted to the distribution member 320 side against the urging force of the spring 374. It is configured so that the force to make it is applied from the distribution member fixing plate 375.
Therefore, even if the distribution member 320 tries to return to the original state by the momentum (reaction) of the state change, since there is no weight of the game ball when returning to the original state, the contact protruding from the distribution member 320. The momentum can be suppressed by the unit 373. As a result, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 320 from returning to the original state with the momentum of the state change, and the game balls are alternately placed in the first region and the second region (in the case of the present embodiment, the first start winning prize). It is possible to improve the certainty of sorting (alternately between the mouth and the second starting winning mouth).

Here, in the present embodiment, when the distribution member 320 is in the first state (see FIG. 115 (a)), the surface of the distribution member fixing plate 375 that the contact portion 373 is in contact with (upper right surface). ) Is sloping down to the right. As a result, the contact portion 373 can be retracted to the distribution member 320 side against the urging force of the spring 374 while the distribution member 320 is changing its state. Further, the amount of protrusion of the contact portion 373 is larger than that in the case where the surface (upper right surface) with which the contact portion 373 is in contact is parallel to the horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10 or is inclined upward toward the right side. Since the size is increased, even if the distribution member 320 tries to return to the original state with the momentum of the state change, the momentum can be effectively suppressed.
Further, when the distribution member 320 is in the second state (see FIG. 115 (b)), the surface (upper left surface) of the distribution member fixing plate 375 with which the contact portion 373 is in contact faces the left side. It is sloping down. As a result, the contact portion 373 can be retracted to the distribution member 320 side against the urging force of the spring 374 while the distribution member 320 is changing its state. Further, the amount of protrusion of the contact portion 373 is larger than that in the case where the surface (upper left surface) with which the contact portion 373 is in contact is parallel to the horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10 or is inclined upward toward the left side. Since the size is increased, even if the distribution member 320 tries to return to the original state with the momentum of the state change, the momentum can be effectively suppressed.

In the present embodiment, as the distribution member 320 rotates clockwise around the rotation shaft 322, the distribution member fixing plate 375 counterclockwise around the distribution member fixing plate rotation shaft 375a. As the distribution member 320 rotates counterclockwise around the rotation shaft 322 as it rotates in the clockwise direction, the distribution member fixing plate 375 clocks around the distribution member fixing plate rotation shaft 375a. Although it is configured to rotate in the clockwise direction, the distribution member fixing plate 375 can also be configured not to rotate.
When the distribution member fixing plate 375 is rotated as in the present embodiment, the inclination angle of the surface with which the contact portion 373 abuts can be increased, so that the distribution member 320 has a momentum to return to its original state. It can be suppressed more effectively. However, even if the distribution member fixing plate 375 does not rotate, the shape of the distribution member fixing plate 375 is a mountain shape as shown in FIG. 115 (that is, the upper right surface is inclined downward toward the right side). In addition, if the upper left surface is a mountain shape that is inclined downward toward the left side), the surface (upper left surface or upper right surface) that the contact portion 373 abuts is parallel to the horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10, or shakes. Compared with the case where the shape of the component fixing plate 375 is a valley shape (that is, a valley shape in which the upper right surface is inclined upward toward the right side and the upper left surface is inclined upward toward the left side). Therefore, the amount of protrusion of the contact portion 373 becomes large. Therefore, even if the distribution member fixing plate 375 is not rotated, the momentum of the distribution member 320 to return to the original state can be effectively suppressed as compared with the case of these cases.

Further, the shape of the distribution member fixing plate 375 acts to retreat the contact portion 373 to the distribution member 320 side against the urging force of the spring 374 while the distribution member 320 is changing its state. Any shape can be used. For example, the upper left surface and the upper right surface of the distribution member fixing plate 375 may have a shape parallel to the horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10. Further, on the upper left surface of the distribution member fixing plate 375, a recess for accommodating the tip end portion of the contact portion 373 when the distribution member 320 is in the first state is provided, and on the upper right upper surface of the distribution member fixing plate 375. The shape may be such that the distribution member 320 is provided with a recess in which the tip end portion of the contact portion 373 is accommodated when the distribution member 320 is in the second state. When the recess is provided, the upper left surface of the distribution member fixing plate 375 may be parallel to the horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10, may be inclined upward toward the left side, or the upper right upper surface of the distribution member fixing plate 375. May be parallel to the horizontal plane of the gaming machine 10 or may be inclined upward toward the right side.

Next, the control characterized by the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described.
As described above, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured to give a predetermined privilege based on the number of starting memories reaching a predetermined number. Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, the start of the special effect mode, the start of the look-ahead advance notice effect, and the start of the probability state notification effect are executed based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number. Has been done.
Here, in the case of the present embodiment, the first start memory display and the second start memory display are displayed without distinction as the start memory display M. Further, the upper limit of the number of start memories (the upper limit of the sum of the number of first start memories and the number of second start memories) is set to eight. That is, no upper limit is set for each of the number of the first start memory and the number of the second start memory, and the upper limit is set for the sum of these (the number of start memories).
The upper limit of the number of start-up memories is not limited to eight, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. Further, an upper limit may be provided for the number of first start memories and the number of second start memories. Further, as the start memory display M, it is also possible to distinguish between the first start memory display and the second start memory display.

First, the start of a special effect mode based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number will be described.
In the present embodiment, as the effect mode, a special mode (special effect mode) that can be set at a special time when a predetermined condition is cleared and a normal mode (normal effect) that can be set at a time other than a special time (normal time). Mode) and is prepared. As normal modes, "A mode", "B mode", and "C mode" are prepared. For example, as shown in FIG. 116 (a), the mode shifts among these three normal modes at normal times. Suppose it is configured. Further, it is assumed that "D mode" is prepared as a special mode.
Then, for example, as shown in the upper figure of FIG. 116 (b), the gaming machine 10 starts when the condition display N1 "Now, when five or more start memories are stored, D mode" is displayed on the display device 41. When 5 or more memories are accumulated, it is determined that the condition has been cleared, and the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (D mode). In the lower left figure of FIG. 116 (b), since six start memories are accumulated and the condition is cleared, the mode is shifted to the special mode (D mode). On the other hand, if five or more start memories are not accumulated, it is determined that the condition is not cleared, and the mode transition (shift to the special mode) is not performed, and the state in which the normal mode is set is maintained. In the lower right figure of FIG. 116 (b), since only two start memories are stored and the condition is not cleared, the normal mode remains.

[Special mode change processing]
Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a special effect mode based on the fact that the effect control device 200 performs the special mode change process shown in FIG. 117 and the number of start memories reaches a predetermined number. To start. Therefore, this special mode change process is executed when the normal mode is set.
In this special mode change process, first, it is determined whether or not the condition display N1 is displayed on the display device 41 (step E11).

If it is determined in step E11 that the condition display N1 is displayed on the display device 41 (step E11; Y), the process proceeds to step E14.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E11 that the condition display N1 is not displayed on the display device 41 (step E11; N), the special figure variation display game being executed can display the condition display N1. It is determined whether or not the game is a variable display game (step E12). Here, the special figure variation display game capable of displaying the condition display N1 is a special figure variation display game executed before the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode (the effect mode is set to the special mode). It is not limited to the special figure variation display game that is executed immediately before the special figure variation display game that can be changed to.

If it is determined in step E12 that the special figure variation display game being executed is not a special figure variation display game capable of displaying the condition display N1 (step E12; N), the special mode change process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E12 that the special figure variation display game being executed is a special figure variation display game capable of displaying the condition display N1 (step E12; Y), the condition display N1 is displayed on the display device 41. Is displayed (step E13), and the process proceeds to step E14.

In step E14, it is determined whether or not the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E14).
The predetermined timing is arbitrary as long as it is a timing before the end of the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode. For example, when a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of display of the condition display N1. This may be the case when the special figure variation display game that was being executed at the start of the display of the condition display N1 is finished, or the special figure variation that was being executed at the start of the display of the condition display N1. Special figure variation display game executed after execution of the display game (not limited to the special figure variation display game executed after (immediately after) the special figure variation display game that was being executed when the display of condition display N1 was started) It may be the timing when is finished.
Further, the condition displayed on the condition display N1 is not limited to the illustrated condition (that is, the condition that five or more start memories are stored), and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

If it is determined in step E14 that the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has not been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E14; N), the special mode change process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E14 that the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has been cleared by the predetermined timing (step E14; Y), the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (D mode). The effect display corresponding to the special mode (D mode) is displayed on the display device 41 (step E15), and the special mode change process is completed. Here, when the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode has already started, if it is determined that the condition is cleared, the normal mode is immediately changed to the special mode. On the other hand, if the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode has not been started, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode substantially at the same time as the start of the special figure variation display game.
In the present embodiment, when the condition displayed on the condition display N1 is satisfied, it is determined that the condition is cleared, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is displayed on the condition display N1, for example. It is also possible to configure it so that it is determined that the condition is cleared when a predetermined operation (for example, the operation of the effect button 25) is performed while the condition is satisfied and the condition is satisfied.

Here, the game control device 100 and the effect control device 200 can execute a variable display game on the display device 41 based on the fact that the game ball has won a prize in the start opening (first start winning opening, second starting winning opening, etc.). Control means.
Further, the game control device 100 serves as a start storage means capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of winning games balls to the start ports (first start winning opening, second start winning opening, etc.) as start memory.
Further, the effect control device 200 serves as a mode setting means capable of setting a plurality of effect modes as the effect mode of the variable display game in the display device 41.
Further, the effect control device 200 performs a promotion display (condition display N1) for prompting the number of start memories to be a predetermined number in the variation display game executed before the execution of the variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed. It serves as a promotion display means.
Then, the mode setting means (effect control device 200) changes the effect mode from the normal mode to the special mode based on the number of start memories stored in the start storage means (game control device 100) reaching a predetermined number. If the number of start memories does not reach the predetermined number by the predetermined timing after the promotion display (condition display N1) is performed by the promotion display means (effect control device 200), the effect is produced. It is configured not to change the mode.

Therefore, the effect mode can be changed based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number, and the number of start memories can be changed in the variable display game executed before the execution of the variable display game in which the effect mode can be changed. Since the promotion display (condition display N1) for prompting the number to be set to a predetermined number is displayed, it is possible to promote the winning of the game ball to the starting port and improve the operating rate of the game machine 10.
Further, since the promotion display (condition display N1) is performed in the variation display game executed before the execution of the variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed, the variation display game in which the promotion display (condition display N1) is performed is a special game. It is possible to give an impression as if there is, and it is possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to a player who wants to play a game in a manner different from that of other players.
Further, if the number of start memories does not reach the predetermined number by the predetermined timing after the promotion display (condition display N1) is performed, the effect mode is not changed, so that the player tries to increase the start memory quickly. To do. Therefore, it is possible to promote the player's launch of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the game machine 10.

The promotion display means (effect control device 200) can also be configured to perform promotion display (condition display N1) in a variable display game in which the effect mode can be changed.
In this case, the special figure variation display game capable of displaying the condition display N1 in step E12 is a special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode.

Next, the start of the look-ahead notice effect based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number will be described.
It is assumed that the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a rotating light (so-called pachinko machine (registered trademark)) L as an accessory for producing a game.
Then, for example, when the game machine 10 displays the condition display N1 on the display device 41 that "the rotating light may rotate if eight start memories are stored now ...", as shown in FIG. 118 (FIG. 118 (FIG. 118). (See a)), when eight start memories are accumulated (see FIG. 118 (b)), it is determined that the condition has been cleared, and a look-ahead notice effect using the rotating light L (light emission and rotation of the rotating light L) is executed. (See FIG. 118 (c)), and then the special result mode is derived and displayed (see FIG. 118 (d)). Of course, even if it is determined that the conditions have been cleared, the pre-reading notice effect using the rotating light L may not be executed, and even if the pre-reading notice effect using the rotating light L is executed, the special result mode is derived and displayed. It may not be.
In the case of the present embodiment, the start memory display M indicating the number of start memories currently stored may be displayed in the display screen of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. 116, or is shown in FIG. 118. As described above, it may be displayed outside the display screen of the display device 41.

[Rotating light rotation processing]
Specifically, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control device 200 performs the rotation light rotation process shown in FIG. 119, and the rotation light L is turned on based on the fact that the number of start memories reaches a predetermined number. Start the pre-reading notice effect used.
In this rotating light rotation process, first, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit (step E21).

If it is determined in step E21 that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is not a big hit (step E21; N), the rotation light rotation process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E21 that the result of the special figure variation display game being executed is a big hit (step E21; Y), it is determined whether or not the condition display N1 is displayed on the display device 41. (Step E22).

If it is determined in step E22 that the condition display N1 is displayed on the display device 41 (step E22; Y), the process proceeds to step E25.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E22 that the condition display N1 is not displayed on the display device 41 (step E22; N), the special figure variation display game being executed can display the condition display N1. It is determined whether or not the game is a variable display game (step E23). Here, the special figure variation display game capable of displaying the condition display N1 in step E23 is a special figure variation display game capable of executing a look-ahead notice effect using the rotating light L. Therefore, in the case of the present embodiment, the special figure variation display game in which the result is a big hit includes a special figure variation display game capable of executing a look-ahead advance notice effect using the rotating light L and a look-ahead advance notice effect using the rotating light L. Includes special figure variation display games, which are not executable. It is also possible to make all the special figure variation display games in which the result is a big hit as a special figure variation display game capable of executing the look-ahead notice effect using the rotating light L. In this case, it is possible to configure so that the process of step E23 is not executed.

If it is determined in step E23 that the special figure variation display game being executed is not a special figure variation display game capable of displaying the condition display N1 (step E23; N), the rotation light rotation process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E23 that the special figure variation display game being executed is a special figure variation display game capable of displaying the condition display N1 (step E23; Y), the condition display N1 is displayed on the display device 41. Is displayed (step E24), and the process proceeds to step E25.

In step E25, it is determined whether or not the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E25).
It should be noted that the predetermined timing in step E25 is the special figure variation display game that was being executed at the start of the display of the condition display N1 (that is, the special figure variation display game that can execute the look-ahead notice effect using the rotating light L). It is arbitrary as long as the timing is before the result is derived and displayed.
Further, the condition displayed on the condition display N1 is not limited to the illustrated condition (that is, the condition that eight start memories are stored), and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

If it is determined in step E25 that the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has not been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E25; N), the rotation light rotation process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step E25, when it is determined that the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E25; Y), the rotating light L emits light and rotates (the rotating light L is used). The pre-reading notice effect) is executed at a predetermined ratio (for example, a ratio of 1/2) (step E26), and the rotation light rotation process is completed.

In step E26, the look-ahead advance notice effect using the rotating light L is configured to be executed at a predetermined ratio, but the present invention is not limited to this, and it is also possible to always execute the look-ahead notice effect using the rotating light L. Is.
Further, it is also possible to change the effect mode together with the pre-reading advance notice effect using the rotating light L.
Further, instead of (or in addition to) the pre-reading advance notice effect using the rotating light L, it is also possible to execute the pre-reading advance notice effect using an accessory other than the rotating light L.

Further, in addition to (or instead of) the look-ahead advance notice effect using the rotating light L, it is also possible to execute the look-ahead notice effect using the start memory display M.
In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 120 (a), when the gaming machine 10 displays the condition display N1 "Now, when five or more start memories are stored, D mode" is displayed on the display device 41, the start memory is stored. When 5 or more are accumulated, it is determined that the condition is cleared, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (D mode), and the latest start memory (that is, the latest start memory) among the start memories accumulated at the start of the display of the condition display N1 is displayed. By changing the display mode of the start memory display M indicating the last stored start memory), the look-ahead notice effect using the start memory display M is executed. In the example shown in FIG. 120, the start memory display M indicating the latest start memory among the start memories stored at the start of the display of the condition display N1 is the third start memory display M from the left (FIG. 120 (a)). (See), the display mode of the start memory display M, which is the third from the left, has changed (see FIG. 120 (b)). Of course, even if it is determined that the conditions have been cleared, the pre-reading notice effect may not be executed.

[Read-ahead display processing]
Specifically, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment displays the start memory display M based on the fact that the number of start memories reaches a predetermined number by performing the look-ahead display process shown in FIG. 121 by the effect control device 200. Start the pre-reading notice effect used. This look-ahead display process is executed when the normal mode is set.
In this look-ahead display process, first, a special figure variation display game in which the condition display N1 can be displayed when the condition display N1 is not displayed (a special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to a special mode, or an effect mode). When the variable display game (variable display game) that is executed before the execution of the special figure variable display game that can be changed to the special mode starts, it is determined whether or not the result of the special figure variable display game based on the latest start memory is a big hit. (Step E31). Here, in the present embodiment, it is assumed that the ratio of the result to be a big hit is 1/300.

When it is determined in step E31 that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the latest start memory is a big hit (step E31; Y), the display device is displayed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/10 ratio). The look-ahead guidance display (condition display N1) is displayed on 41 (step E32), and it is determined whether or not the conditions displayed on the look-ahead guidance display (condition display N1) have been cleared by a predetermined timing (step). E33).
In the case of the present embodiment, since the look-ahead notice is executed together with the change of the effect mode, the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice (that is, the latest start memory among the start memories stored at the start of the display of the condition display N1). It is assumed that the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode is executed earlier than the special figure variation display game based on. Therefore, the predetermined timing in step E33 (and step E37 described later) is arbitrary as long as it is the timing before the end of the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode.
Further, the condition displayed on the look-ahead guidance display (condition display N1) is not limited to the illustrated condition (that is, the condition that five or more start memories are stored), and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

If it is determined in step E33 that the condition displayed on the look-ahead guidance display (condition display N1) has not been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E33; N), the look-ahead display process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E33 that the condition displayed on the look-ahead guidance display (condition display N1) has been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E33; Y), the look-ahead display (start memory display M) is displayed. The pre-reading notice effect used) is executed (step E34). Then, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (D mode), the effect display corresponding to the special mode (D mode) is displayed on the display device 41 (step E35), and the look-ahead display process is completed. Here, when the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode has already started, if it is determined that the condition is cleared, the normal mode is immediately changed to the special mode. On the other hand, if the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode has not been started, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode substantially at the same time as the start of the special figure variation display game. The look-ahead display may be performed as soon as it is determined that the condition is cleared, or may be performed at the same time as the effect mode is changed.

Further, in step E31, when it is determined that the result of the special figure variation display game based on the latest start memory is not a big hit (step E31; N), it is displayed at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/2000 ratio). The look-ahead guidance display (condition display N1) is displayed on the device 41 (step E36), and it is determined whether or not the conditions displayed on the look-ahead guidance display (condition display N1) have been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E36). Step E37).

If it is determined in step E37 that the condition displayed on the look-ahead guidance display (condition display N1) has not been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E37; N), the look-ahead display process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E37 that the condition displayed on the look-ahead guidance display (condition display N1) has been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E37; Y), the look-ahead display (start memory display M) is displayed. The pre-reading notice effect used) is executed (step E38). Then, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (D mode), the effect display corresponding to the special mode (D mode) is displayed on the display device 41 (step E39), and the look-ahead display process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode setting means (effect control device 200) is configured to be able to change the effect mode and execute the look-ahead notice based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number. Has been done. Therefore, based on the number of start-up memories reaching a predetermined number, not only the effect mode can be changed but also the look-ahead advance notice can be executed, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.
In the present embodiment, as the look-ahead notice effect using the start memory display M, the look-ahead notice effect for the latest start memory among the start memories accumulated at the start of the display of the condition display N1 is configured. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, it is possible to perform a look-ahead advance notice effect for all of the start memories stored at the start of the display of the condition display N1.

Further, in the present embodiment, the look-ahead notice (in the case of the present embodiment, the look-ahead notice using the start memory display M) is executed together with the change of the effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the number of start memories is not limited to this. It is also possible to execute only the look-ahead notice without changing the effect mode based on the fact that the number reaches a predetermined number. In this case, the special figure variation display game capable of displaying the condition display N1 is before the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode or the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode. It is not limited to the variable display game executed in, but is arbitrary. Further, in this case, the predetermined timings in steps E33 and E37 are arbitrary as long as they are timings before the start memory display M indicating the start memory that is the target of the look-ahead notice disappears. Further, in this case, the content of the condition display N1 is, for example, "pre-reading notice when 5 or more start memories are stored now". Further, in this case, when the special mode is set, the condition display N1 may be displayed and the look-ahead notice may be executed.

Next, the start of the probability state notification effect based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number will be described.
In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 122 (a), when the gaming machine 10 displays the condition display N1 "Now, when five or more start storages are stored, D mode" is displayed on the display device 41, the start memory is stored. When 5 or more are accumulated, it is determined that the condition has been cleared, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (D mode), and the probability state display N2 for notifying the current probability state is displayed on the display device 41. Executes the probability state notification effect with. In the example shown in FIG. 122 (b), since six start memories are accumulated and the condition is cleared, the mode shifts to the special mode (D mode) and the probability state display N2 (that is, the current probability) of "high probability" is displayed. A probability state display N2) for notifying that the state is a high probability state is displayed on the display device 41. Of course, even if it is determined that the condition is cleared, the probability state notification effect may not be executed.

[Probability status notification processing]
Specifically, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control device 200 performs the probability state notification process shown in FIG. 123, and the probability state notification effect is based on the fact that the number of start memories reaches a predetermined number. To start. This probability state notification process is executed when the normal mode is set.
In this probability state notification process, first, a special figure variation display game in which the condition display N1 can be displayed when the condition display N1 is not displayed (a special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to a special mode, or an effect When the variable display game (variable display game) that is executed before the execution of the special figure variable display game whose mode can be changed to the special mode starts, it is determined whether or not the current probability state is not clearly notified and the state is unclear. (Step E41). Here, the unclear state may be one of a state in which the current probability state is not notified and a state in which the current probability state is unclearly notified, or both. You may.

If it is determined in step E41 that the state is not in an unclear state (step E41; N), that is, if the state is in a clear state that clearly notifies the current probability state, the probability state notification process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E41 that the state is in an unclear state (step E41; Y), it is determined whether or not the current probability state is a high probability state (step E42).

When it is determined in step E42 that the current probability state is a high probability state (step E42; Y), the condition display N1 is displayed on the display device 41 at a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/10 ratio). Then (step E43), it is determined whether or not the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has been cleared by the predetermined timing (step E44).
In the case of the present embodiment, since the probability state is notified at the same time as the effect mode is changed, the probability state does not change at least until the special figure special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode ends. And. Therefore, the predetermined timing in step E44 (and step E48 described later) is arbitrary as long as it is the timing before the end of the special figure special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode.
Further, the condition displayed on the condition display N1 is not limited to the illustrated condition (that is, the condition that five or more start memories are stored), and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.

If it is determined in step E44 that the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has not been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E44; N), the probability state notification process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E44 that the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E44; Y), it is notified that the current probability state is a high probability state. The probability state display N2 for this is displayed on the display device 41 (step E45). Then, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (D mode), the effect display corresponding to the special mode (D mode) is displayed on the display device 41 (step E46), and the probability state notification process is completed. Here, when the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode has already started, if it is determined that the condition is cleared, the normal mode is immediately changed to the special mode. On the other hand, if the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode has not been started, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode substantially at the same time as the start of the special figure variation display game. The probability state may be notified as soon as it is determined that the condition is cleared, or may be notified at the same time as the effect mode is changed.

Further, in step E42, when it is determined that the current probability state is not a high probability state (step E42; N), that is, when the current probability state is a low probability state, a predetermined ratio (for example, 1/10). The condition display N1 is displayed on the display device 41 (step E47), and it is determined whether or not the conditions displayed on the condition display N1 have been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E48).

If it is determined in step E48 that the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has not been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E48; N), the probability state notification process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E48 that the condition displayed on the condition display N1 has been cleared by a predetermined timing (step E48; Y), it is notified that the current probability state is a low probability state. The probability state display N2 for this is displayed on the display device 41 (step E49). Then, the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (D mode), the effect display corresponding to the special mode (D mode) is displayed on the display device 41 (step E50), and the probability state notification process is completed.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the mode setting means (effect control device 200) can change the effect mode and notify the probability state based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number. It is configured as. Therefore, based on the number of start-up memories reaching a predetermined number, not only the effect mode can be changed, but also the probability state can be notified, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The method of notifying the probability state is not limited to the display of the probability state display N2, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate.
Further, in the present embodiment, it is configured to execute the notification of the probability state together with the change of the effect mode, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the effect mode is changed based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number. It is also possible to execute only the notification of the probability state without performing. In this case, the special figure variation display game capable of displaying the condition display N1 is before the execution of the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode or the special figure variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed to the special mode. It is not limited to the variable display game executed in, but is arbitrary. Further, in this case, the predetermined timing in step E44 is arbitrary as long as it is the timing before the probability state changes to the low probability state, and the predetermined timing in step E48 changes the probability state to the high probability state. If it is the previous timing, it is arbitrary. Further, in this case, the content of the condition display N1 is, for example, "probability state notification when 5 or more start memories are stored now". Further, in this case, when the special mode is set, the condition display N1 may be displayed and the probability state notification may be executed.

Further, the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment has a special mode change process (see FIG. 117), a rotating light rotation process (see FIG. 119), a look-ahead display process (see FIG. 121), and a probability state notification process (see FIG. 123). It can be configured to execute all, or it can be configured to execute any (but not limited to) of these processes.
When both the special mode change process (see FIG. 117) and the look-ahead display process (see FIG. 121) are executed, for example, when the condition display N1 is displayed in the special mode change process, the condition display N1 disappears. After that, it is configured not to execute the look-ahead display process until it returns to the normal mode, and when the condition display N1 is displayed in the look-ahead display process, the condition display N1 disappears and then the special mode change process is performed until the normal mode is returned. It is recommended to configure so that Further, when both the special mode change process (see FIG. 117) and the probability state notification process (see FIG. 123) are executed, for example, when the condition display N1 is displayed in the special mode change process, the condition display N1 is displayed. Is configured not to execute the probability state notification process until it disappears and then returns to the normal mode. When the condition display N1 is displayed in the probability state notification process, the condition display N1 disappears and then returns to the normal mode. , It is recommended to configure so that the special mode change process is not executed. Further, when both the look-ahead display process (see FIG. 121) and the probability state notification process (see FIG. 123) are executed, for example, when the condition display N1 is displayed in the look-ahead display process, the condition display N1 disappears. After that, the probability state notification process is not executed until the normal mode is returned. When the condition display N1 is displayed in the probability state notification process, the condition display N1 disappears and the look-ahead is read until the normal mode is returned. It is preferable to configure so that the display process is not executed. However, when only the look-ahead notice is executed without changing the effect mode based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number, or based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number, When only the probability state notification is executed without changing the effect mode, it is not necessary to consider such things.
Further, all the special figure variation display games may be special figure variation display games capable of displaying the condition display N1.

<Modification example 1>
The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can be configured so that a plurality of predetermined numbers are set as predetermined numbers, and the effect mode can be changed based on the number of starting memories sequentially reaching the predetermined number. is there. Hereinafter, specific examples thereof will be shown in Modifications 1-1 and 1-2, but the values of each predetermined number, the mode transition destination, etc. are not limited to the specific examples, and can be arbitrarily changed as appropriate. ..

<Modification 1-1>
In the modified example 1-1, as the effect mode, a first mode (normal mode), a second mode (chance mode), and a third mode (high expectation mode (special mode)) are prepared. Suppose you are.
Then, for example, a transition request requesting that the number of start memories be changed from "8"->"any of 1 to 4"->"8" is notified, that is, "8" as a plurality of predetermined numbers. It is assumed that "pieces", "any of 1 to 4 pieces", and "8 pieces" are set in this order.
In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 124, when eight start memories are accumulated in the state where the first mode (normal mode) is set, the gaming machine 10 starts from the first mode (normal mode). After shifting to the second mode (chance mode), after the start memory is reduced to any one of 1 to 4, when 8 pieces are accumulated again, it is judged that the condition is cleared and the second mode (chance) is determined. Mode) shifts to the third mode (high expectation mode (special mode)). However, if the number of start memories decreases to 0 while the second mode (chance mode) is set, it is determined that the conditions have not been cleared, and the second mode (chance mode) is started. Return to the first mode (normal mode). Further, when the start memory is reduced to 0 in the state where the third mode (high expectation mode) is set, the third mode (high expectation mode) is changed to the first mode (normal mode). Return.
Here, the transition request may or may not be displayed on the display device 41 as a promotion display (condition display N1). When the transition request is not displayed on the display device 41, it is assumed that the transition request is published on, for example, the website of the model.

<Modification 1-2>
In the modification 1-2, it is assumed that a normal mode and a special mode are prepared as the effect mode. In the modified example 1-2, the player needs to perform a predetermined operation (in the case of the present modified example, the operation of the effect button 25) when the number of start memories reaches a predetermined number. Different from 1.
Then, for example, a transition request of mission "7318" (a transition request requesting that the number of start memories be changed from "7" → "3" → "1" → "8") is notified. That is, it is assumed that "7", "3", "1", and "8" are set in this order as a plurality of predetermined numbers.
In this case, in the gaming machine 10, for example, as shown in FIG. 125, the effect button 25 is operated with seven start memories accumulated (see FIG. 125 (a)), and then the start memories are reduced to three. The effect button 25 is operated in this state (see FIG. 125 (b)), then the effect button 25 is operated in a state where the start memory is reduced to one (see FIG. 125 (c)), and then the start memory is stored. When the effect button 25 is operated with eight pieces accumulated (see FIG. 125 (d)), it is determined that the condition is cleared (mission success), and the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (FIG. 125 (e)). reference). However, if the effect button 25 is operated in a state where the number of start memories is not requested by the transition request, it is determined that the condition is not cleared (mission unsuccessful). If it is determined that the mission is unsuccessful, an instruction display may be displayed instructing the mission to be restarted from the beginning.

It should be noted that, based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number in sequence, in addition to (or instead of) changing the effect mode, it is possible to configure the look-ahead advance notice to be executed, and the probability state. It is also possible to configure the notification so that it can be executed.
Further, when the number of start memories is a predetermined number (for example, 4) or more, the number of start memories is set so that the execution time (special figure fluctuation time) of the special figure variation display game is shortened. It is also possible to configure the effect mode to be changeable based on the fact that a predetermined number or more of states are maintained over a plurality of (for example, 10 times) variable display games. In this case as well, in addition to (or instead of) changing the effect mode, it is possible to configure the look-ahead advance notice to be executable, or it is possible to configure the probability state notification to be executable. is there.

By configuring as in the first modification, the effect mode can be changed based on the number of starting memories sequentially reaching a predetermined number, so that the player is also interested in the transition of the number of starting memories. It becomes possible to enhance the interest of the game.
Also, in order to change the production mode, the number of start memories must be changed in sequence, so the changed production mode can give the impression that it is a special mode, and with other players. Can also give satisfaction to players who want to play in different production modes.
Further, as in the example shown in FIG. 125, the number of start-up memories sequentially reaches a predetermined number, and each time the predetermined number is reached, a predetermined operation (in the case of the present embodiment, the operation of the effect button 25) is performed. When the effect mode can be changed based on the above, it is possible to give a strong impression that the player has participated in the effect mode change process. Further, in this case, since the effect mode is not changed unless a predetermined operation is performed, the player who does not want to change the effect mode does not have to perform the predetermined operation, and gives a feeling of satisfaction to such a player. Can be done.

<Modification 2>
It is also possible to configure the production mode to be changeable based on the occurrence of irregular prizes.
The game machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that the game balls are alternately distributed to the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening by the distribution member 320 of the ball distribution device 300. Since the ball distribution device 300 is provided with the return suppression mechanism 370, the game ball can be used as the first start winning opening and the second start prize as compared with the conventional ball distribution device without the return suppression mechanism 370. There is a high degree of certainty that it will be distributed alternately to the mouth. However, on rare occasions, the distribution member 320 may return to its original state due to the momentum (reaction) of the state change. Therefore, when the game ball is continuously won in the first start winning opening of the ball distribution device 300, and when the game ball is continuously won in the second start winning opening of the ball distribution device 300. The later winning in the above is called an irregular winning, and when an irregular winning occurs, a predetermined privilege is given to the player (in the case of this modified example, a special production mode is started). ..

In this modified example, the production mode can be changed based on the occurrence of irregular prizes, but the present invention is not limited to this, and pre-reading notice can be executed based on the occurrence of irregular prizes. It is also possible to configure it so that the notification of the probability state can be executed.
That is, it is possible to set the occurrence of an irregular prize as a start condition of a special effect mode, a start condition of a look-ahead advance notice effect, or a start condition of a probability state notification effect. Is also possible.
In addition, it is also possible to configure both a predetermined privilege based on the number of starting memories reaching a predetermined number and a predetermined privilege based on the occurrence of irregular winnings to be executed. is there.

In this modification, the first start memory display and the second start memory display are displayed separately as the start memory display M so that it becomes clear that an irregular prize has occurred. Specifically, the first start memory display M1 and the second start memory display M2 are displayed in different display modes (in the example shown in FIG. 126, different shapes).
In this case, for example, as shown in FIG. 126, the gaming machine 10 is continuously connected to the second start winning opening of the ball distribution device 300 in a state where the normal mode is set (see FIG. 126 (a)). When the second start memory is continuously stored due to the winning of the game ball, it is determined that an irregular winning has occurred (see FIG. 126 (b)), and the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (D mode). (See FIG. 126 (c)). Similarly, if the first start memory is continuously stored due to the consecutive winning of the game balls in the first start winning opening of the ball distribution device 300, it is determined that an irregular winning has occurred, and the normal mode is used. To the special mode (D mode).

[Special mode change processing]
Specifically, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, the effect control device 200 performs (or additionally) the special mode change process shown in FIG. 127 in place of (or in addition to) the special mode change process shown in FIG. 117. A special production mode is started based on the occurrence of irregular prizes.
In this special mode change process, first, it is determined whether or not the normal mode is set, that is, whether or not the current effect mode is the normal mode (step E51).

If it is determined in step E51 that the normal mode is not set (step E51; N), that is, if the special mode has already been set, the special mode change process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E51 that the normal mode is set (step E51; Y), it is determined whether or not an irregular winning has occurred (step E52).

If it is determined in step E52 that no irregular winning has occurred (step E52; N), the special mode change process is terminated.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step E52 that an irregular prize has occurred (step E52; Y), the mode shifts from the normal mode to the special mode (D mode), and the effect display corresponding to the special mode (D mode) is displayed. Displayed on the display device 41 (step E53), the special mode change process ends.

Since the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes two second starting winning openings, even if irregular winnings do not occur, if the gaming balls continuously win the second starting winning openings, That is, a game ball may win a prize in the second start winning opening of the ball distribution device 300, and then a game ball may win a prize in the normal variable winning device 37, or vice versa. In this case, that is, if the game ball continuously wins the second start winning opening even though the irregular winning has not occurred, even if the predetermined privilege is given (start of a special production mode, etc.) You don't have to do it.

Since the conventional gaming machine does not have a return suppression mechanism in the ball distribution device, the distribution member may bounce with the swinging momentum (reaction) and return to the original state, so that the game ball is returned to the original state. There was a problem that the certainty of alternating distribution was poor.

On the other hand, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment has a base member (mounting base member 310), an inflow port 301 into which a gaming ball flowing down the gaming area 32 can flow in, and a gaming ball flowing into the inflow port 301. The first state leading toward the first region (in the case of the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening) and the second state leading toward the second region (in the case of the present embodiment, the second starting winning opening) alternate with each other. A game machine including a ball distribution device 300 having a distribution member 320 for distributing a game ball to the first region and the second region, and the ball distribution device 300 is a game. It is provided with a return suppressing mechanism 370 capable of suppressing the state-converted distribution member 320 from being converted to the original state by recoil due to the inflow of balls.

Therefore, the return suppressing mechanism 370 can prevent the distribution member 320 from returning to the original state with the momentum of the state change, so that the game balls are alternately placed in the first region and the second region (this implementation). In the case of the form, it is possible to improve the certainty of sorting (alternately between the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening).

The return suppression mechanism 370 of the first example, which is an example of the return suppression mechanism 370, has a distribution member side magnet (rotating magnet 371) provided on the distribution member 320 and a base member (mounting base member 310). When the distribution member 320 is in the neutral posture between the first state and the second state, the distribution member side magnet (rotation) provided at a position facing the distribution member side magnet (rotating magnet 371). It is configured to include a base member-side magnet (fixed magnet 372) having the same poles as the magnet 371).

When the return suppression mechanism 370 of the first example is provided, even if the distribution member 320 tries to return to the original state with the momentum of the state change, the distribution member side magnet (rotating magnet 371) and the base member side magnet ( Since the fixed magnets 372) repel each other and suppress the momentum, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 320 from returning to the original state with the momentum of the state change, and the game ball can be moved to the first region and the second region. It is possible to improve the certainty of alternately allocating the regions (in the case of the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening alternately).
Further, since the distribution member 320 does not stay in the neutral position due to the repulsion between the distribution member side magnet (rotating magnet 371) and the base member side magnet (fixed magnet 372), the distribution member 320 is surely placed. The state can be converted to the first state or the second state.

The return suppression mechanism 370 of the second example, which is an example of the return suppression mechanism 370, includes a first magnet (first rotating magnet 371A) on the distribution member side provided on the distribution member 320 and a base member (mounting base member 310). ), The first magnet (first magnet) on the distribution member side is provided at a position facing the first magnet (first rotating magnet 371A) on the distribution member side when the distribution member 320 is in the first state. A first magnet (first fixed magnet 372A) on the base member side of a pole different from the rotating magnet 371A), a second magnet on the sorting member side (second rotating magnet 371B) provided on the sorting member 320, and a base. Of the members (mounting base member 310), the distribution member side provided at a position facing the distribution member side second magnet (second rotating magnet 371B) when the distribution member 320 is in the second state. It is configured to include a second magnet (second fixed magnet 372B) on the base member side of a pole different from the second magnet (second rotating magnet 371B).

When the return suppressing mechanism 370 of the second example is provided, even if the distribution member 320 tries to return to the original state with the momentum of the state change, the distribution member side first magnet (first rotating magnet 371A) and the base The first magnet on the member side (first fixed magnet 372A) is attracted, or the second magnet on the distribution member side (second rotating magnet 371B) and the second magnet on the base member side (second fixed magnet 372B) are attracted to each other. Since the momentum can be suppressed by attracting each other, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 320 from returning to the original state due to the momentum of the state change, and the game balls are alternately placed in the first region and the second region (book). In the case of the embodiment, it is possible to improve the certainty of sorting (alternately between the first starting winning opening and the second starting winning opening).
In addition, the distribution member 320 is reliably changed to the first state by attracting the first magnet on the distribution member side (first rotating magnet 371A) and the first magnet on the base member side (first fixed magnet 372A). The distribution member 320 is surely in the second state by attracting the second magnet on the distribution member side (second rotating magnet 371B) and the second magnet on the base member side (second fixed magnet 372B). The state can be changed to.

In the return suppressing mechanism 370 of the third example, which is an example of the return suppressing mechanism 370, the lock pin (contact portion 373) provided on the distribution member 320 and the lock pin (contact portion 373) are separated from the distribution member 320. The urging member (spring 374) that urges the lock pin (contact portion 373) so as to protrude, and the contacted member (distribution member fixing plate 375) to which the tip of the lock pin (contact portion 373) abuts. ), And the contacted member (distribution member fixing plate 375) has a lock pin (contact) against the urging force of the urging member (spring 374) while the distribution member 320 is changing its state. The lock pin (contact portion 373) has a shape that acts to retreat the distribution member 320 toward the distribution member 320, and the lock pin (contact portion 373) has a shape in which the distribution member 320 is in the first state and the second state. In addition, it is configured to be in a state of protruding from the distribution member 320 by the urging force of the urging member (spring 374).

When the return suppressing mechanism 370 of the third example is provided, even if the distribution member 320 tries to return to the original state with the momentum of the state change, the lock pin (contact portion 373) protruding from the distribution member 320 causes the distribution member 320 to return to the original state. Since the momentum can be suppressed, it is possible to prevent the distribution member 320 from returning to the original state due to the momentum of the state change, and the game balls are alternately placed in the first region and the second region (in the present embodiment). In this case, it is possible to improve the certainty of sorting (alternately between the first start winning opening and the second starting winning opening).
The urging member is not limited to the spring, and is optional as long as it is a member capable of urging the lock pin (contact portion 373) so that the lock pin (contact portion 373) protrudes from the distribution member 320. is there.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the ball distribution device 300 is a distribution state display means (decorative substrate 350, left state confirmation opening 346L, right state confirmation opening 346R) for displaying the state of the distribution member 320. It has.

Therefore, it is possible to display whether the distribution member 320 is in the first state or the second state by the distribution state display means (decorative substrate 350, left state confirmation opening 346L, right state confirmation opening 346R). The player can see that the current flow path guides the game ball toward the first region (in the case of the present embodiment, the first start winning opening) and the game ball in the second region (in the case of the present embodiment). It is easy to recognize which side is switched to, the flow path leading to the second start winning opening).

Further, according to the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, in the first area, the first start port (1st start port) in which the first lottery by the first lottery means (game control device 100) is executed when the game ball enters the ball. The first start winning opening), and the second area is the second starting opening (second starting winning opening) in which the second lottery is executed by the second lottery means (game control device 100) triggered by the entry of the game ball. ).

The ball distribution device 300 included in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment alternately shifts the gaming balls between the first starting opening (first starting winning opening) and the second starting opening (second starting winning opening) with high certainty. Since the configuration is such that the lottery can be sorted, the first lottery and the second lottery can be performed alternately.
The first area is not limited to the first starting winning opening, and may be, for example, a second starting winning opening, a winning opening other than the starting winning opening, or an area other than the winning opening. You may.
Further, the second area is not limited to the second starting winning opening, and may be, for example, the first starting winning opening, a winning opening other than the starting winning opening, or an area other than the winning opening. You may.

In the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the operating rate cannot be improved because the effect mode is changed only by performing a manual input operation (button operation or the like). Further, there is a problem that it is not possible to give a feeling of satisfaction to a player who wants to play in a manner different from that of other players.

On the other hand, in the game machine 10 of the second embodiment, the control means (game control device 100, effect control device 200) capable of executing the variable display game on the display device 41 based on the game ball winning the starting port. The control means is a start storage means (game control device 100) capable of storing up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls winning a prize at the start port as start memory, and a variable display game on the display device 41. A mode setting means (effect control device 200) capable of setting a plurality of effect modes as the effect mode is provided, and the mode setting means (effect control device 200) is stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). It is executed before the execution of the variable display game in which the effect mode can be changed and the effect mode can be changed, or the variable display game in which the effect mode can be changed, based on the number of start-up memories being reached. In the variable display game, the promotion display means (effect control device 200) for performing the promotion display (condition display N1) for prompting the number of start memories to be set to a predetermined number is provided.

Therefore, the effect mode can be changed based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number, and the effect mode can be changed, or the variable display game executed before the execution of the variable display game. Since the promotion display (condition display N1) for prompting the number of start memories to be set to a predetermined number is displayed, it is possible to promote the winning of the game ball to the start port and improve the operating rate of the game machine 10.
Further, since the promotion display (condition display N1) is performed in the variation display game in which the effect mode can be changed or the variation display game executed before the execution of the variation display game, the variation display in which the promotion display (condition display N1) is performed. The game can give the impression that it is a special game, and can give satisfaction to a player who wants to play in a manner different from that of other players.
The variable display game that performs the promotion display (condition display N1) includes a variable display game in which the effect mode can be changed and a variable display game that is executed before the execution of the variable display game in which the effect mode can be changed. Either one or both of them may be used.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the mode setting means (effect control device 200) performs the promotion display (condition display N1) by the promotion display means (effect control device 200), and then by a predetermined timing. When the number of start memories does not reach a predetermined number, the effect mode is not changed.

Therefore, if the number of start memories does not reach the predetermined number by the predetermined timing after the promotion display (condition display N1) is performed, the effect mode is not changed, so that the player tries to increase the start memory quickly. To do. Therefore, it is possible to promote the player's launch of the game ball, and it is possible to improve the operating rate of the game machine 10.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the mode setting means (effect control device 200) can change the effect mode and execute a look-ahead notice based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number. ..

Therefore, based on the number of start-up memories reaching a predetermined number, not only the effect mode can be changed but also the look-ahead advance notice can be executed, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, the mode setting means (effect control device 200) executes the change of the effect mode and the notification of the probability state based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number. It is possible.

Therefore, based on the number of start-up memories reaching a predetermined number, not only the effect mode can be changed, but also the probability state can be notified, so that the interest of the game can be enhanced.

The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment can be given at least one predetermined privilege (change of production mode, pre-reading notice, notification of probability state, etc.) based on the number of starting memories reaching a predetermined number. It should be. That is, at least one of the effect mode change, the look-ahead notice, and the probability state notification may be given based on the number of start memories reaching a predetermined number, and these benefits (effect mode). At least one of the benefits other than (change of, pre-reading notice, probability status notification) may be granted. At least one of these benefits and at least one of the benefits other than these benefits may be granted.

Further, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, there are a plurality of predetermined numbers, and the mode setting means (effect control device 200) can change the effect mode based on the number of start memories reaching the predetermined number in sequence. It is also possible to configure it to be.

With this configuration, the effect mode can be changed based on the number of starting memories sequentially reaching a predetermined number, so that the player becomes interested in the transition of the number of starting memories. It is possible to enhance the interest of the game.
Also, in order to change the production mode, the number of start memories must be changed in sequence, so the changed production mode can give the impression that it is a special mode, and with other players. Can also give satisfaction to players who want to play in different production modes.

The gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the above-described embodiment as the gaming machine, and is not limited to, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, sparrow ball gaming machines, and the like. It is applicable to all gaming machines that use the above-mentioned gaming balls and slot machines that are gaming machines that use medals.

In addition, the embodiments disclosed this time should be considered to be exemplary in all respects and not restrictive. Further, each configuration of the above-described embodiment and modification may be applied in combination. The scope of the present invention is shown by the scope of claims rather than the above description, and it is intended to include all modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 Game machine 32 Game area 41 Display device 100 Game control device (first lottery means, second lottery means, control means, start storage means)
200 Production control device (control means, mode setting means, promotion display means)
300 Ball distribution device 301 Inflow port 310 Mounting base member (base member)
320 Distribution member 346L Left status confirmation opening (Distribution status display means)
346R Right status confirmation opening (Distribution status display means)
350 Decorative board (Distribution status display means)
370 Return suppression mechanism 371 Rotating magnet (Distribution member side magnet)
371A 1st rotating magnet (1st magnet on the distribution member side)
371B 2nd rotating magnet (2nd magnet on the distribution member side)
372 Fixed magnet (base member side magnet)
372A 1st fixed magnet (1st magnet on the base member side)
372B 2nd fixed magnet (2nd magnet on the base member side)
373 Contact part (lock pin)
374 spring (biasing member)
375 Sorting member fixing plate (contact member)
N1 condition display (promotion display)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state when a variable display game in which identification information is variablely displayed is executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition and the result of the variable display game becomes a special result mode.
It is provided with a game control means for comprehensively controlling the game, a display device capable of displaying an effect related to the game, and an effect control means for controlling the display of the display device.
Corresponding to the execution of the variable display game, the variable display game for production can be executed on the display device.
The game control means
An effect mode control means for selecting and setting one of the effect modes from a plurality of effect modes having different effect modes.
An execution mode setting means for setting an execution mode of the variable display game according to the effect mode set by the effect mode control means, and an execution mode setting means.
When the effect mode control means sets the effect mode, the effect mode control means includes an execution number setting means for setting the execution number of the variable display game that maintains the effect mode.
After the end of the special gaming state, it is possible to convert into a first state in which the starting condition is difficult or impossible to be satisfied and a second state in which the starting condition is more easily satisfied than the first state for a predetermined period. It is possible to generate a specific gaming state in which the period in which the variable winning device is in the second state is longer than that in the normal gaming state.
At the start of the variable display game at which the predetermined effect mode ends, information that can identify that the effect mode ends can be transmitted to the effect control means, and at the same time, information that can identify that the effect mode ends can be transmitted .
When the predetermined period ends, information that can identify that the specific gaming state ends can be transmitted to the effect control means.
The effect control means
A gaming machine characterized in that it is possible to set the effect content of a variable display game in which the predetermined effect mode ends in response to receiving information that can identify the end of the effect mode.

Images